JP6616731B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player There is something that was configured. Furthermore, variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means becomes a specific display result, a predetermined game value Is configured to give to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

  The winning value means that a winning ball is paid out or a score or a prize is given in accordance with the winning of a game ball in the winning area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for a player who is easy to win, and for the player. For example, a right to be advantageous can be generated, and a condition for paying out a winning ball can be easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a special symbol (identification information) that is started by variable display means based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. In this case, a “big hit (favorable state)” occurs. The derived display is to stop and display the symbol. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 16 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  Some of these gaming machines are configured to be able to execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display during execution of variable display. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a case where a change effect (action effect) that changes the display mode of the hold display can be executed during execution of variable display, and variable display is executed using a variable display pattern for shortening. Describes executing a shortened change effect to change the display mode of the hold display.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-39496 (paragraphs 0331-0332, FIG. 37)

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is no disclosure about changing the execution timing of the change suggestion effect. Therefore, pending a change in the display of the display mode becomes monotonous in the change suggested effect, it may not be sufficiently improved presentation effect of changes suggested effect.

Then, an object of this invention is to provide the game machine which can improve the production effect of change suggestion production.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state), and includes a first effect display area and a second effect display. Area, storage information for storing variable display information as storage, and specific display means capable of displaying specific display (for example, hold display, active display) in the first effect display area (for example, combined hold storage display) Part 18c, active display area 9A) and determination means for determining whether or not to be controlled to be in an advantageous state (for example, a part for executing step S61 in the game control microcomputer 560. Step S1216A in the game control microcomputer 560) , S1216B, and a plurality of types of variable display times (for example, reach fluctuation time) The variable display is performed over the variable display time of any one of the normal change time 12.5 seconds, the shortened change time 8.0 seconds, and the ultrashort change time 2.0 seconds). Variable display execution means (for example, a part for executing steps S300 to S304 in the game control microcomputer 560; a part for executing steps S801 to S803 in the effect control microcomputer 100) and a determination result of the determination means. Te, changes suggested effect (e.g., acting effect in holding such informational display, pending change announcement attraction, active display change announcement attraction) executable changes suggested directing execution means (for example, at step S8010 in the performance control microcomputer 100 Steps S8021, S810 according to the selected process table The implement portion. In the fifth embodiment, the step of directing the control CPU101 S6501~S6508, S8501~S8509, a portion.) To perform S8601～S8621, provided with, as a change suggested effect, display of specific display Including a predetermined change suggestion effect that suggests whether the aspect changes, and a shift change effect that changes the display aspect of the specific display at the timing of starting the variable display, and the specific display means stores the reserved display as the specific display and the corresponding hold display, the corresponding display and that corresponds to the variable display of the running, and capable of displaying, when a predetermined change suggested presentation is executed and display mode of the specific display change, the movable member (e.g., a movable member 78 , Push button 120, stick controller 122) can be operated (for example, in the fifth embodiment) In the embodiment, the step S8614, S8617, S8620 in the effect control CPU 101 is executed), and the change suggestion effect executing means executes the variable display over a short variable display time among a plurality of types of variable display times. The number of timings at which the change suggesting effect can be executed differs depending on when the variable display is executed over a long variable display time among a plurality of types of variable display times (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 is shown in FIG. As shown in A), in the fluctuation display of the ultrashort fluctuation, only the “change at shift” at the start of the fluctuation can be executed, and as shown in FIGS. 42B and 42C, the fluctuation of the shortening fluctuation and the normal fluctuation. In the display, in addition to the start of change, it is possible to execute an effect effect in the middle of the change or the latter part of the change). As compared with the case where the display mode of the changes, the type of effect is produced viable predetermined change suggested effect at the timing for starting the variable display is large and whether the display mode of the specific display in the first effect display area is changed run a first predetermined change suggested effect suggests, the second and the predetermined change suggest directing suggesting whether a change in a particular display of the display mode by the first effect display area and the manner straddling the second effect display area, the The display mode of the specific display may not change even if any of the first predetermined change suggesting effect and the second predetermined change suggesting effect is executed, and the first predetermined change suggesting effect and the second predetermined change suggesting effect may not be changed. The rate at which the display mode of the specific display changes varies depending on which is executed. According to such a configuration, since the timing at which the change suggestion effect is executed changes according to the variable display time, the effect of the change suggestion effect can be improved.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the change suggestion effect executing means succeeds in changing the display mode of the specific display based on the operation of the operating means (for example, the push button 120, the stick controller 122) as the movable body. (For example, in the fifth embodiment, the production control CPU 101 executes step S8620 after determining Y in step S8612 to change the hold display or the active display, and in step S8612. N may be determined and the process may be terminated as it is), and the operating means is operated when performing control that succeeds in changing the display mode of the specific display (for example, for effect control in the fifth embodiment) CPU 101 executes steps S8617 and S8620 to execute step S8621). It may be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the rendering effect by operating the operation means when the change of the display mode of the specific display is successful.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, the change suggestion effect executing means changes the display mode of the specific display based on the operation of the operating means (for example, the push button 120, the stick controller 122) as the movable body. (For example, in the fifth embodiment, the production control CPU 101 executes step S8620 after determining Y in step S8612 to change the hold display or the active display. In some cases, it may be determined as N in step S8612 and the process may be terminated as it is), and the operating means is operated when performing control to successfully change the display mode of the specific display (for example, in the fifth embodiment, The production control CPU 101 executes steps S8617 and S8620 and executes step S8621. In some cases, the operation means is operated before performing control that succeeds in changing the display mode of the specific display (for example, in the fifth embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 executes step S8610 when Y in step S8609). The stick controller 122 may be vibrated slightly before execution and before the change of the hold display or the active display. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the change suggestion effect executing means is a change suggestion effect (for example, a hold change notice effect A-1 to A- with character effect) in a mode not using the operation means. 3 and active display change notice effects A-1 to A-3) (for example, in the fifth embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 executes processing such as step S8602 when Y is determined in step S8601. to), when executing a change suggestion effect by embodiments using no operation means can perform the change indicated effect by mode is not operated the operating unit (e.g., in the fifth embodiment, the effect control for CPU101 Are step change notice effects A-1 to A-3 accompanied by character effects and active display change notice effects A-1 to A-3. 8613, S8615, executes only the processing of step S8621 it is determined that N respectively S8618) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect by providing the operation means even when it is not operated.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the change suggestion effect executing means performs any one of a plurality of types of display modes (for example, a blue round display and a red round display). The display mode can be changed, and the movable body is operated in different operation modes according to which display mode the specific display is changed (for example, in the fifth embodiment, the effect control 68 and 71, the CPU 101 weakly vibrates the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 when changing to the blue round display, and push button when changing to the red round display. 120 and the stick controller 122 may be vibrated strongly). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect by changing the operation mode of the movable body.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, it is possible to operate a display means (for example, the sub display device 9S shown in FIG. 79) provided with a display area for specific display as a movable body. (For example, as shown in FIG. 79, the sub display device 9S may be rotated when the display mode of the hold display is changed). According to such a configuration, the presentation effect can be improved by operating the display means provided with the display area for specific display.

(Means 7) In any one of the means 1 to 6, the movable body is provided with a plurality of types of operation means (for example, the push button 120 and the stick controller 122), and the change suggestion effect using any of the operation means is executed. (For example, in the fifth embodiment, when the stick controller operation effect is executed and the stick controller 122 is operated, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 71, the push is performed. Compared to the case where the button operation effect is executed and the push button 120 is operated, the display mode of the notice target hold display or the active display changes when the super reach hit is large, and the operating means vibrates more frequently. And the ratio of strong fluctuations in the operating means increases due to the red round display. That) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, since the advantage differs depending on which operation means is used, it is possible to improve the effect.

(Means 8) Another aspect of the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, and has not yet started. With respect to the display, on-hold storage means (for example, a first on-hold storage buffer and a second on-hold storage buffer) for storing as on-hold storage, and on-hold display means for displaying the on-hold display corresponding to the on-hold storage stored in the on-hold storage means ( For example, the total storage storage display unit 18c), a determination unit that determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part for executing step S61 in the game control microcomputer 560), and a plurality of types of variable display times ( For example, the reach variation time includes a normal variation variation time of 12.5 seconds, a shortened variation variation time of 8.0 seconds, and a super shortened variation variation time of 2.0 seconds. Variable display execution means for executing variable display over any one of the variable display times (for example, a part for executing steps S300 to S304 in the game control microcomputer 560. Steps S801 to S803 in the effect control microcomputer 100) And a determination means (for example, a part for executing steps S1216A and S1216B in the game control microcomputer 560) for determining whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state before determination by the determination means based on means of determination results, changes suggested directing suggest whether the display mode of hold display is changed (for example, the action effect in holding such announcement attraction) executable changes suggested demonstration execution means (for example, effect control micro Step S80 in the computer 100 0 comprises a part) and for performing the steps S8021, S8105 according to the process table selected in the change suggested demonstration execution means includes a when the variable display is performed over a short variable display time of the plurality kinds of variable display time The number of timings at which the change suggesting effect can be executed differs depending on when the variable display is executed over a long variable display time among a plurality of types of variable display times (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 42A, in the fluctuation display of the ultrashort fluctuation, only “change at shift” at the start of the fluctuation can be executed. As shown in FIGS. In the variation display, in addition to the beginning of the variation, it is possible to execute an effect effect in the middle or later of the variation). According to such a configuration, since the timing at which the change suggestion effect is executed changes according to the variable display time, the effect of the change suggestion effect can be improved.

(Means 9) In the means 8, the change suggestion effect executing means, when the variable display is executed over the long variable display time of the plurality of types of variable display time, the short variable display time of the plurality of types of variable display time. Compared to when the variable display is executed over a large number of times, the number of timings at which the change suggestion effect can be executed is larger (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 has an extremely shortened variation as shown in FIG. In the fluctuation display, only “change at shift” at the start of fluctuation can be executed. As shown in FIGS. 42B and 42C, in the fluctuation display of the shortened fluctuation and the normal fluctuation, in addition to the fluctuation start, It may be configured such that a late action effect can be executed). According to such a configuration, if the variable display time is long, the timing at which the change suggesting effect is executed increases, so that the effect of the change suggesting effect can be improved.

(Means 10) In the means 8 or 9, the change suggestion effect executing means has different types of change suggestion effects that can be executed in a specific period during execution of variable display according to the variable display time (for example, effect control) As shown in FIG. 42 (A), the microcomputer 100 can execute only “change at shift” at the start of the change in the change display of the ultrashort change, as shown in FIGS. 42 (B) and 42 (C). In addition, the variation display of the shortened variation and the normal variation may be configured such that “lightning effect effect” can be executed in addition to “change at shift” at the start of variation). According to such a configuration, since the type of the change suggestion effect changes according to the variable display time, the effect of the change suggestion effect can be improved.

(Means 11) In any one of means 8 to 10, a change pattern for determining a change pattern of the display mode of the hold display (for example, a change pattern such as hold shown in FIG. 37) based on the determination result of the determining means. A change suggestion effect (for example, an effect effect) is determined according to the change means determined by the change means determined by the change means (for example, the part that executes step S6004 in the effect control microcomputer 100) and variable display. It changes suggested effect determination means determining (e.g., portions for performing the steps S8007 in effect control microcomputer 100) and a change suggested demonstration execution means changes suggested effect based on the determination result of the change suggested effect determination unit Executable (for example, the production control microcomputer 10 Is a process table corresponding to the action effect determined in step S8007 selected in step S8010, it may be configured as part) to perform flop S8021, S8105 according to the process table selected. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a change suggestion effect according to the situation.

(Means 12) Predetermined effect determining means (for example, as shown in FIG. 53) for determining an effect mode of a predetermined effect (for example, a display color change effect in the second embodiment) in any one of the means 8 to 11. A winning effect determining process, etc.) and a predetermined effect executing means (for example, in the second embodiment, the effect controlling microcomputer 100 in accordance with the determination result of the winning effect determining process in FIG. 53). The predetermined effect determining means includes at least a first timing (for example, a timing at which the hold shifts) and a second timing (for example, a timing at which the hold shifts). It is possible to decide to change the production mode at a plurality of change timings including a timing different from one timing) After determining the production mode and the final production mode when starting the regular production (for example, determination by the display color determination process at the time of winning / active in FIG. 54), the decided production mode and final It may be configured to determine a change mode of the production mode (for example, determination by a change mode determination process or the like in FIG. 54) based on a specific production mode. According to such a configuration, compression of data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 13) In any one of the means 8 to 12, the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is variably displayed and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed. A first storage device (for example, a first storage memory buffer) that stores a variable display of the first identification information that has not yet started as a first storage device. Second hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) for storing variable display of the second identification information that has not yet started as the second hold storage, and the hold display means is stored in the first hold storage means. The first hold display can be displayed according to the stored first hold memory (for example, the first hold storage display unit 9a in the third embodiment) and is stored in the second hold storage means. According to the second reserved memory The hold display can be displayed (for example, the second hold storage display unit 9b in the third embodiment), the first state (for example, the low base state (normal state)) and the second state (for example, the high base state). State control means (for example, a part for executing steps S132, S140, S167, S169, and S170 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the first identification information being executed. Variable display corresponding display means (for example, the active display area 9A) capable of displaying variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information or the variable display of the second identification information, and the hold display means is in the first state. When controlled, the first hold display is displayed while the second hold display is not displayed (for example, in the third embodiment, the effect control When the computer 100 is in the second state, the second hold display is displayed while the first hold display is not displayed (for example, in the third embodiment, when the computer 100 executes step S634C). The control microcomputer 100 executes steps S634G and S634L (see FIG. 62), and the variable display corresponding display means displays the second identification information being executed in a variable manner even when controlled to the first state. Correspondingly, a variable display corresponding display may be displayed (for example, in the third embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 executes step S8002; see FIG. 63). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

(Means 14) In any one of the means 8 to 13, the first effect display area (for example, the sub display device 9S (sub display apparatus) in the fourth embodiment) and the second effect display area (for example, An effect display device 9 (main display device) in the fourth embodiment is provided, and the hold display means can display the hold display in the first effect display area corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means. Yes (e.g., a fourth embodiment of the sum pending memory display portion 18c provided on the sub-display device 9S in form), changes suggested demonstration execution means, whether a display mode of hold display in the first effect display area is changed first change suggested effect suggests that (e.g., 4 first pending change announcement attraction in the embodiment of (pending change announcement attraction involving action effect a 1, pending change announcement attraction 3, pending change announcement attraction 5)), 1st performance Second change suggested directing suggest whether the display mode of hold display is changed by aspects are interlocked with a display area and a second effect display area (e.g., the second hold change announcement attraction in the fourth embodiment (action The hold change notice effect 2 with the effect B, the hold change notice effect 4 and the hold change notice effect 6)) can be executed, and either the first change suggesting effect or the second change suggesting effect is executed to display the hold display. The degree of expectation varies depending on whether the display mode has changed (for example, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, when the second hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes) The first hold change notice effect may be executed and the expectation (reliability) for the big hit may be higher than the case where the display mode of the hold display is changed. According to such a configuration, by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects, the effect of the change suggestion effects can be improved.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation | designated command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding specific area | region and a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows pending | holding etc. change pattern setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a change pattern determination table, such as a holding | maintenance. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an effect production determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect of notice effects, such as holding. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect of notice effects, such as holding. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the production | presentation aspect of notice effects, such as holding. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the production | presentation aspect of notice effects, such as holding. It is explanatory drawing which shows the further another example of the production | presentation aspect of notice effects, such as holding. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution timing of the effect effect in notice effects, such as a holding | maintenance. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution timing of the effect effect in notice effects, such as a holding | maintenance. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process at the time of winning in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the display color determination process at the time of winning and active in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination ratio by the color determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination ratio by the color determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the determination method of the change aspect in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change mode determination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination ratio by the level-up table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination ratio by the level-up table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the hold display and active display according to the game state in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the hold display and active display in a low base state in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pending | holding change notice effect determination table in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the pending | holding change notice effect in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the pending | holding change notice effect in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding change notice effect determination process in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pending | holding change notice effect determination table in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pending | holding change timing determination table in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production | presentation symbol fluctuation | variation start process in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the active display change notification effect determination table in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect symbol variation process in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect symbol variation process in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of the pending | holding change notice effect in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of the pending | holding change notice effect in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of the pending | holding change notice effect in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of the pending | holding change notice effect in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of the pending | holding change notice effect in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production | presentation aspect of a hold display change notice effect in the case of providing a sub display device as a movable body.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The member that forms the extra ball tray (lower tray) 4 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape), for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). Is attached to the stick controller 122 that can be tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). It should be noted that the stick controller 122 has a predetermined operation, for example, by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 3) capable of performing an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation or the like on the trigger button 121 is provided inside the operation rod of the stick controller 122. 3) is built-in. In addition, a tilt direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided in the lower plate main body and the like below the stick controller 122. The stick controller 122 includes a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  The member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is subjected to a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by a player pressing a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) that detects the player's operation act on the push button 120 may be provided inside the body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 120 is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 as the position approached to either right or left in the upper plate and the lower plate, maintaining the vertical relationship. Alternatively, the mounting position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 is not in the vertical relationship, but may be in the horizontal relationship, for example.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol after the effect symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same.

  On the right side of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, on the right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a), a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information. Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning port 14 than the first starting winning port 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol hold memory display 18b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first hold memory number (the hold memory is also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). ) Is displayed, a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is provided with an area (total pending storage display unit) 18c for displaying the total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. It has been. In this embodiment, the total pending storage display unit 18c that displays the total number is provided, so that it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. .

  In addition, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is provided with an active display area 9A in which a predetermined display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed. In this embodiment, in the active display area 9A, a display similar to the hold display displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c is performed as a predetermined display. Hereinafter, a display in the same manner as the hold display displayed in the active display area 9A is also referred to as an active display. In addition, as long as it can be recognized that the display corresponds to the currently displayed variable display, the display need not be the same as the hold display, and other figures, characters, and the like may be displayed. .

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a movable member 78 is provided above the effect display device 9 so as to be operable by driving a movable member motor 78a. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 is formed in a shape simulating a butterfly, for example, and is moved downward by driving the movable member motor 78a, so that it is part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is configured to be operable in such a manner as to cover it.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball apparatus 20 that forms a big winning opening is provided below the variable winning ball apparatus 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Moreover, the small display is formed in, for example, a square shape. Note that the normal symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) of, for example, 00 to 99. In addition, the normal symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decoration lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying “O” and “X”). It may be comprised.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of fluctuation display of special symbols is increased compared to the normal state). Then, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Even in the short state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) when the symbol variation time is shortened although it is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out-port 26 through which a hit ball that has not won is taken. In addition, four speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right and lower left and right outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when the probability variation is a big hit, the game state is shifted to a high probability state (probability variation state), and the game ball is likely to start and win (that is, special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and effects). The display device 9 shifts to a high base state that is a gaming state controlled so that a variable display execution condition on the display device 9 is easily established (in this embodiment, shifts to a time-short state). In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, the state is shifted to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the change time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened. The frequency of being played (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory becomes faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined backup period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. A random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 that provides detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a large winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit 64 for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols is performed.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35 and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control the sound output.

  The effect control means is also connected to a trigger sensor 125, a tilt direction sensor unit 123 provided in the stick controller 122, a vibrator motor 126, and a push sensor 124 provided in the push button 120, as will be described later. However, the illustration is omitted in FIG.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control microcomputer 101 including an effect control CPU 101 and an RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100 and maps the VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols), and background image data. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 allows the signal input from the relay board 77 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action on the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. In addition, the production control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. . Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 moves the movable member 78 by outputting a drive signal to the movable member motor 78 a via the output port 105.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined effect period (for example, a change period of the effect symbol).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not in the on state, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (Step S7). If it is confirmed that such a protection process has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  After confirming that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power outage or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 restores the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (usually big hit, probability change big hit, sudden probability change big hit, small hit or loss) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80 (step). S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits a first symbol variation designation command and a second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 13). You may make it do. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may restart the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, measurement of the saved variable time timer value is resumed, and the special symbol fluctuation display is resumed and saved. When the value of the variable time timer that has been timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value to be described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Instead of always sending the display result designation command when the power failure is restored, the CPU 56 may first check whether the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0 or not. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state is not in a state, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that the power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs at the time of the power failure. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determination random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and the like are initialized to a flag for selectively performing processing according to a control state. Value is set.

  In addition, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol (ordinary random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls itself a game device such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the gaming machine. In the process of sending a command signal to control other microcomputers, or the game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Execute control.

  Further, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag for normal symbol fluctuation is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the normal symbol fluctuation speed every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. In addition, the CPU 56 executes a normal symbol effect display on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process ends.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA 1-1 to the non-reach are used as the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-3 is prepared. Among these, the non-reach PA1-1 is a fluctuation pattern that does not involve reach and does not involve a pseudo-ream or sliding effect, and is a fluctuation pattern for normal fluctuation that is not a shortened fluctuation (in this example, a fluctuation time of 12.50 seconds). It is. Further, the non-reach PA1-2 is a variation pattern that does not involve reach and does not involve a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, and is a variation pattern for shortening variation (in this example, a variation time of 8.00 seconds). The non-reach PA1-3 is a fluctuation pattern that does not involve reach and does not involve pseudo-continuous or sliding effects, and has a fluctuation pattern for a super-shortening variation that has a shorter variation time than a shortening variation (in this example, a variation pattern). Time 2.00 seconds).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when non-reach is shifted, a variation pattern with pseudo-ream and slip effects is not included, but when non-reach is shifted, Alternatively, it may be configured to provide a variation pattern with pseudo-ream and sliding effects.

  Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are variations patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 and super PB3-1 to super PB3-2 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when using normal PB2-1 among the fluctuation patterns used when reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, re-variation is performed three times when using the super PA 3-1 to the super PA 3-2 among the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-continuous. Note that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3 to Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to SuperPA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 Is prepared. In FIG. 6, the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns used when sudden probability change big hit or small hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns that are used when the sudden sudden change is not big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, the re-variation is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 that is used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-variation is performed once.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating (1) a big hit type determination random number and (4) a normal symbol determination random number. Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal jackpot determination table used in a normal state and a short time state (that is, a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each value described in the right column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is a jackpot determination value.

  8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. Moreover, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be a big hit (a normal big hit, a probability variation big hit, and a sudden probability variation big hit described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicate the probability (ratio) of small hits. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, a case where a small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first winning symbol 13 is started and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second winning symbol 14 is started and won and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination tables 131 a and 131 b stored in the ROM 54. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the holding memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. FIG. 8E shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the stored memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, based on a random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type, the jackpot type is determined as “normal jackpot”, “ This table is referred to in order to determine one of “probability big hit” and “sudden probability big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, in the big hit type determination table 131a, five determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” (40 minutes). Is determined to be a sudden probability variation big hit at a ratio of 5), whereas one judgment value is assigned to the “sudden probability variation big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131b (ratio of 1/40) Will suddenly be determined to be a promising big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first winning symbol 13 is started and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second winning symbol 14 is started and won and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared to the case where the fluctuation display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “suddenly probable big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “suddenly probable big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie, It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, the types of jackpots include “normal jackpot”, “probability variation jackpot”, and “sudden probability variation jackpot”. In this embodiment, the case where the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is shown in this embodiment. Not limited to those. For example, a 10R probability variable jackpot that is controlled to 10 round jackpot game, a 7R probability variable jackpot that is controlled to 7 round jackpot game, and a 5R probability variable jackpot that is controlled to 5 round jackpot game may be provided. In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpot types: “normal jackpot”, “probability big hit”, and “sudden probability big hit”. However, the number is not limited to three, for example, four or more types. A big hit type may be provided. Conversely, the jackpot type may be less than three types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “ordinary big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a 15-round big hit gaming state and is shifted to the short-time state only after the big hit gaming state ends (see step S167 described later). Then, after shifting to the time reduction state, when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the time reduction state is ended (see steps S168 and S137 to S140). Even if the variable display is not finished a predetermined number of times, the time saving state is also finished when the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  The “probable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to 15 rounds of the big hit gaming state and shifts to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, it is changed to the probable change state and the short time state is also entered. (See steps S169 and S170 described later). Then, until the next big hit occurs, the probability variation state and the time reduction state continue (see step S132).

  In addition, “suddenly promising big hit” means that the number of times of opening the big prize opening is smaller than in “normal big hit” or “probable big hit” (in this embodiment, opening for 0.1 seconds is allowed twice). Is a big hit. In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. In addition, in “normal big hit” and “probable big hit”, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds, whereas in “sudden probable big hit”, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is long. It is extremely short, 0.1 seconds, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to win a big winning opening during a big hit game. In this embodiment, after the sudden probability change big hit gaming state is finished, the state is changed to the probability change state (in this embodiment, the state is changed to the probability change state and also to the time reduction state. Step S169, which will be described later). (See S170). Then, until the next big hit occurs, the probability variation state and the time reduction state continue (see step S132).

  It should be noted that the mode of sudden probability change big hit is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the number of times of opening of the big prize opening may be 15 times (15 rounds), which is the same as the normal big hit or suddenly probable big hit, and only the opening time of the big prize opening may be made extremely short as 0.1 seconds.

  In this embodiment, even when the “small hit” is reached, the big prize opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, and the same control as the big hit gaming state by the “suddenly probable big hit” is performed. Is called. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained. By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the fun of the game is improved. In addition, when it is configured so that all types of big hits are probable big hits, it is not necessary to provide small hits. In addition, when all big hit types are probabilistic big hits, if you make a small hit, it is just a transition to a probable change state (high probability state) and a sudden probable big hit without a short time state (high base state). (It is preferable that the opening pattern of the big winning opening is the same in the case of the sudden change big hit and the small win).

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with a random value of 1, and corresponding to each of “normal jackpot”, “probable variation jackpot”, and “sudden probability variation jackpot” (jackpot type judgment value) ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random number (random 2) values for variation pattern type determination, which are normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 9A used when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, and FIG. 9B used when the big hit type is “probable big hit”. The allocation of determination values for the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Accordingly, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in the case of “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”, the value of random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 150 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  In addition, for the super reach big hit, the variation pattern type with pseudo-continuity (variation pattern type including the variation pattern of Super PA3-3 and Super PA3-4) and the variation pattern type without super-continuity (Super PB3-3, super It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, in both the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for normal big hit and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B for probability variation big hit, the variation pattern type with super reach and pseudo-ream, super reach and pseudo ream A variation pattern type that is not accompanied is assigned.

  Further, in the big hit variation pattern type judgment table 132C used when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, when the big hit type such as special CA4-1 and special CA4-2 is other than “suddenly probable big hit” A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, the sudden hit is likely to be changed to the big hit state by the normal big hit or the probable big hit. The variation pattern type can be determined.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D has a plurality of types of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9D, when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown. .

  FIGS. 10A to 10C are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C. Among these, FIG. 10 (A) shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. FIG. 10B shows a variation pattern type determination table 135B for loss that is used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. FIG. 10C shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135 </ b> C used when the gaming state is a probability change state or a time-short state. The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a loss symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3, a determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the normal state and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 230 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storage.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the game and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type If the value is 1 to 79, the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the effect such as the pseudo-ream and the slide effect) regardless of the total number of reserved storage (non-reach CA2-1). Thus, it can be seen that the variation pattern of the non-reach normal variation non-reach PA1-1 as shown in FIG. Due to such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination table 135A, 135B) includes at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, combined reserved memory number) stored in the reserved memory means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer) for a part, Common determination values (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B) are assigned. Note that the “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” means that, as shown in this embodiment, for example, the variable display result is not accompanied by a reach, and is not accompanied by an effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slide effect. It is a variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) used when a big hit is not made.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the game and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type If 1 to 99, regardless of the total number of pending storage, at least the reach is not accompanied (there is no effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slide effect). To be executed (because at least one of the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3, as shown in FIG. 12 described later, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach of non-reach normal variation) It can be seen that the fluctuation pattern is any one of PA1-3.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the fluctuation pattern type of the non-reach CA2-3 is selected in the probability variation state or the short-time state (high base state), and the fluctuation of the super shortening fluctuation of the non-reach PA1-3 is selected. The case where the pattern can be determined and the fluctuation pattern of the super shortened fluctuation of the non-reach PA1-3 can be determined if the total pending storage number is 3 or more even in the normal state (low base state) However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the change pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 can be selected and the change pattern of ultra-short change of non-reach PA1-3 can be determined only in the case of the probability change state or the short time state (high base state). Also good. In addition, for example, even in the normal state (low base state) and the total number of pending storages is less than 3, it may be configured to be able to determine the variation pattern of the ultrashort variation with a low probability. In the case of (high base state), a variation pattern type of non-reach CA 2-1 or non-reach CA 2-2 may be selected to determine a variation pattern of normal variation or shortened variation.

  In this embodiment, the non-reach fluctuation pattern includes a non-reach PA1-1 having a normal fluctuation (fluctuation time of 12.5 seconds) and a non-reach PA1-2 having a shortened fluctuation (fluctuation time of 8.0 seconds). Although the case of using three kinds of fluctuation patterns with the non-reach PA1-3 with a super shortening fluctuation (fluctuation time of 2.0 seconds) is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. You may comprise so that a fluctuation pattern may be provided. In this case, for example, in addition to the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-1 to PA1-3 shown in this embodiment, a non-reach variation pattern with a variation time of 4.0 seconds may be provided.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory views showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit”. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table according to the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is specially selected. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that either CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is selected. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “out of range”. It is a table referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H).

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol identification command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 and A002 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, a jackpot start designation command or a small hit / sudden probability sudden change jackpot start designation command is used. Specifically, the big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used for “ordinary big hit” or “probable big hit”, and the small hit for “sudden probable big hit” or “small hit”. / Sudden probability change big hit start designation command (A002 (H)) is used. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for suddenly probable big hit start designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end designation command: an ending 1 designation command). The jackpot end designation command (A301 (H)) is used to end the jackpot game by “normal jackpot” or “probability variation jackpot”. Command A302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit an ending designation command for sudden probability variation big hit end designation in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in case of small hit. Also good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the probability change state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the time-short state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) for designating that the first starting prize has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that there has been a second start winning. In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) that designates the total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total pending storage number. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage count subtraction designation command) that specifies that 1 is added to the total pending storage count. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a total pending memory count subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending memory count, but does not use the total pending memory count subtraction designation command. When subtracting the total pending storage number, a total pending storage number designation command for designating the total pending storage number after subtraction may be transmitted.

  The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol design command) that indicates whether or not a big hit, a small win or not, and a big hit type determination result among the winning determination results. is there. The command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range is included in the variation pattern type determination random number among the winning determination results. (Variation category command).

  In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing described later (see FIG. 22), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not it is a big hit, a small hit or not, Then, it is determined in which determination value range the random value for determining the variation pattern type falls. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating the big hit or the small hit or a value for designating the type of the big win is set, and control for transmission to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Further, a value for designating a range of a determination value as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and the type of the big hit, Based on the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made and the type of the big hit.

  For example, when it is determined that “out of the game” is given in the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (design 1 designating command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that the “normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “probability big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “suddenly promising big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 4 designation command) in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the “small hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 5 designation command) in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Note that the EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read when setting a symbol designating command and when setting a display result designating command.

  16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in this embodiment, which gaming state is being used, which display result is the display result of the special symbol or production symbol, and the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the time of starting winning A value is set in the EXT data according to whether it is determined that any of the determination values falls within the range, and a variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the normal state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79. Determine whether or not. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize at least that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 100 and 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 215 and 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  Note that the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above-described variation categories belong are specifically shown in FIGS. 10 (A) and 10 (B). The values are derived by picking up values that can be boundaries of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table for loss. This also applies to the subsequent fluctuation categories 9 to 10 and 21 to 29, and is assigned to each fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 9 (A) to (D) and FIG. 10 (C). A threshold that is used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of the range of the determined determination value.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in a probable change state or a short time state and out of place at the time of winning a start, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first sets the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type to 1. It is determined whether or not 219. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 56 performs the variation in which “08 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Send a category 9 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). Send a variable category 10 command.

  Note that the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 even when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short time state. By doing so, a common determination value can be assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the gaming state. For this reason, when performing the process of step S232 of the effect process at the time of winning to be described later, if it is out of place, the common determination process may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. In this case, the game state determination process in step S226 can be made unnecessary.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the “usual big hit” is made at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the effect processing at the time of winning to be described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74. Determine whether. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “10 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 21 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A variation category 22 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3). A variable category 23 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that “probability big hit” is obtained at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the effect processing at the time of winning to be described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the random pattern type determination random number is 1 to 38. Determine whether. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “13 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 24 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A variable category 25 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). A variation category 26 command is transmitted.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the winning odds are suddenly won at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100. Determine. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “16 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 27 commands are transmitted. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-2), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “17 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 28 commands are transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit is made at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  Note that the total number of pending storage is not always the same when the winning determination is made at the time of starting winning and when the variable display is actually started, so the fluctuation indicated by the winning determination result designation command There may be a case where the pattern type does not coincide with the variation pattern type actually used in the variation display. However, in this embodiment, since at least the non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3 fluctuation pattern types are assigned a common determination value regardless of the total number of pending storages. (See FIGS. 9 and 10), there is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display that is actually executed. For this reason, in this embodiment, a notice effect such as hold, which is a kind of prefetch notice effect, is executed based on the winning determination result indicating that the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 or super CA3-3. Note that a notice effect such as a hold may be executed even when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1. Further, only when it is determined that the non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3 variation pattern types are obtained, the variation category commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 (specifically, the variation category 1 command, (Variation category 8 command, variation category 23 command, variation category 26 command only) may be transmitted, and the variation category command may not be transmitted in the case of winning determination results of other variation pattern types. If it is determined at the time of winning that it is other than non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7 and super CA3-3, a variation category command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified may be transmitted. Good.

  The “prefetching notice effect” is a notice effect that is executed before the start of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when execution of a notice effect such as hold, which is a kind of prefetch notice effect, is determined when a start prize is generated, the hold display and the active display are displayed in a normal mode (in this example, white display). A notice effect such as holding is executed to change to a special display mode (in this example, blue, green, red round display, or display imitating a treasure box) different from the round display. In this embodiment, when a notice effect such as hold is executed, the display of the hold display is started in the normal mode or any special display mode at the timing when the start winning is generated, and each change timing of the variable display thereafter. The effect is executed at the time of starting change, the middle of change, or the latter half of change, which will be described later, and the effect of sequentially changing the hold display to be notified to one of the special display modes is executed. Thereafter, at the timing when the variable display of the advance notice target is started, the hold storage of the advance notice object is consumed, the hold display of the advance notice object is deleted, and the active display is displayed in the active display area 9A. In the variation display of the target, the action effect can be executed at each variation timing (at the beginning of variation, middle of variation, or later of variation), and the active display can be changed to one of the special display modes (thus, this embodiment). Then, the notice effect such as hold includes at least both the part that executes the action effect and the part that changes the hold display or the active display of the notice object). Then, when the change display of the notice target is finished, the active display of the special display mode is deleted. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a notice effect such as hold is executed, the display of the special display mode (hold display, active display) is continued until the variable display of the notice target is finished.

  Note that the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. For example, in addition to the notice notice effect such as a hold, a special display such as a chance eye symbol is continuously displayed over a plurality of variations as a pre-reading notice effect. Various effects such as performing an effect that stops and displays the result, performing an effect that counts down over multiple variations, or performing an effect that changes the effect mode in such a manner that the background screen changes Embodiments are possible.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command described above from the game control micro computer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  18 and 19 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 turns on the first start winning opening 13 when the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is turned on. If a winning has occurred, a first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S311 and S312). If the second start port switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning port 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313, S314). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable symbol special display can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined hold storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4, the special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process as described later. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 30), and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening process (step S305): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, control is performed to transmit the special winning opening open designation command to the production control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the special winning opening open processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for opening the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the command for opening a special prize opening is specified, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a command for opening a special winning opening that designates round 10 (A10A (H)).

  Large winning opening open process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special prize opening opening process, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). In addition, control is performed to transmit a designation command after the big hit release to the production control microcomputer 100, and when all rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. Further, when all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end processing (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 20A is a flowchart showing the first start port switch passing process in step S312. FIG. 20B is a flowchart showing the second start port switch passing process in step S314.

  First, the first start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start port switch passing process executed when the first start port switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first Whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the number of one reserved memory is 4 is confirmed (step S1211A). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1212A) and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1213A). In addition, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (step S1214A).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13), data indicating “first” is set, When the second start port switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the second start winning port 14), data indicating “second” is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 13 a is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), and the first 2 When the start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  FIG. 21A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 21 (A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 21A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 21A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the 2-start winning opening 14. Accordingly, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 21B) (see FIG. 21B). Step S1215A). In the process of step S1215A, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (when starting winning a prize) and stored in advance in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 21B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to holding storage. As shown in FIG. 21B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes prize-winning effect processing for preliminarily determining the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected winning prize is subsequently executed (step S1216A). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1217A), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1218A). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1219A), and sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to the EXT data and sets the total pending storage number designation command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1220A).

  It should be noted that by executing the processing of steps S1217A and S1218A, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 always designates a symbol every time the first start winning opening 13 is won and the effect processing at the time of winning in step S1216A is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S1217A to S1220A is executed, a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs and the effect designating process at the time of winning in step S1216A is executed. A set of four commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, a first start winning designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command, are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

  Next, the second start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the second start port switch passing process that is executed when the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold port number). Whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the memory number is 4 is confirmed (step S1211B). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1212B) and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1213B). In addition, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (step S1214B).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 21B) ( Step S1215B). In the process of step S1215B, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a prize-time effect process (step S1216B). Then, the CPU 56 performs control for transmitting a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1217B), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1218B). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1219B), and sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to the EXT data and sets the total pending storage number designation command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1220B).

  It should be noted that by executing the processing of steps S1217B and S1218B, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 always designates a symbol each time it starts winning at the second start winning opening 14 and executes the effect processing at the time of winning in step S1216B. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, when the process of steps S1217B to S1220B is executed, the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs, and the effect designating process at the time of winning in step S1216B is executed. A set of four commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, a second start winning designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command, are transmitted together in one timer interrupt.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S1216A and S1216B. In the winning effect processing, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1215A and S1215B with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the effect symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing to be described later, determining the big hit type or changing the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting processing In addition to this, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 and before the display of variation based on the start winning is started, By executing the winning presentation process, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the big hit or the small win is made, and in which judgment value range the value of the big hit type or the variation pattern type determination random number. By doing so, the variation display result and variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and the effect control microcomputer is based on the determination result at the time of winning as will be described later. A notice effect such as a hold for notifying that it will be a big hit or a super reach is executed during the change display of the effect symbol by 100.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the normal big hit determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 sets a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state). It is confirmed whether or not (step S221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1215A and S1215B with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. Are matched (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variation displays will be executed after confirming whether or not the state of probability variation has been made in step S221 at the time of starting winning, until the actual display of variation based on the starting winning is actually started. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed (for example, the start of change) from when it is confirmed whether or not it is in the probable change state at step S221 at the time of starting winning, until when the change display based on the starting winning is actually started. If there is a probable big hit or sudden probable big hit before, the normal state changes to the probable state.) Therefore, the gaming state determined at step S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not always match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change of the game state in the currently stored storage is specified, and the determination at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. Also good.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1215A and S1215B and FIG. ) And (C) are compared with the small hit determination value, and it is confirmed whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing in step S1216A is executed), the CPU 56 determines the small hit determination table (the first winning determination table shown in FIG. 8B). It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set for (for special symbol). Further, when there is a start winning at the second starting winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing in step S1216B is executed), the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8C. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets EXT data “00 (H)” indicating “out of” in the symbol designation command. Is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process for determining the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, in step S225, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is a probability change state and whether or not it is a time reduction state (specifically, whether or not a probability change flag and a time reduction flag are set). Determine. It should be noted that there are a plurality of times during the period from the confirmation of whether or not the engine is in a promiscuous state and the short-time state at the time of starting winning, until the start of the variable display based on the starting winning. Variable display may be performed. Therefore, the game state changes between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S225 and whether or not the state is the short time state and the time when the variation display based on the start winning is actually started. (For example, when a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation, the normal state may change to a probable state). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change of the game state in the currently stored storage is specified, and the determination at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. Also good.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold for detachment according to the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination is incorporated in advance, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within any determination value range. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is determined.

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is the probability variation state or the time saving state. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 219 in step S232 to be described later. Is determined to set “08 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 219 (that is, if it is 220 to 251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (that is, 1 to 79). Is determined to set “00 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 89 or less (that is, 80 to 89), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 99 or less (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), it is determined that “03 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is 214 or less (ie, 200 to 214), it is determined that “05 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, when it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not less than 229 (that is, 230 to 251), it is determined that “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  In the threshold determination example described above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value. It will never fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 that is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order. It is determined whether it is in the range. In this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. Conversely, 229, 214, You may determine with 199, 169, 99, 89, and 79. The same applies to the determination using other threshold values shown below.

  Note that the threshold value in the normal state may always be set without determining the gaming state in step S225. Even in such a configuration, the range of determination values is shared by at least the variation pattern type that is “non-reach” and the variation pattern type that is “super-reach”. It can be determined whether or not it is “out of” or “out of super reach”.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 uses the symbol designating command for the EXT data “04 (H)” indicating “small hit”. Is set (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a threshold for small hits (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 251 and determines that the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251) in step S232 described later. It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18 (H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1215A and S1215B. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (when executing the winning effect processing in step S1216A), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type determination table (first Using the special symbol 131a, it is determined whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit” or “sudden probability big hit”. Further, when there is a start winning at the second starting winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing at step S1216B is executed), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 131b is used to determine whether the big hit type is “ordinary big hit”, “probable big hit” or “suddenly probable big hit”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that the “normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data “01 (H)” indicating the “normal big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “probability big hit”, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “02 (H)” indicating “probability big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “suddenly probable big hit” is determined, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “03 (H)” indicating “suddenly probable big hit” to the symbol designation command.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for jackpots according to the jackpot classification determined by step S229 (step S231).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the thresholds 74 and 149 when it is determined as “normal big hit”. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 in step S232 described later. Is determined to set “10 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), it is determined that “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 149 (that is, 150 to 251), it is determined to set “12 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines “probability big hit”, the thresholds 38 and 79 are set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 38 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 38 (that is, 1 to 38). Is determined to set “13 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that “14 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “15 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines “suddenly probable big hit”, it sets the threshold 100. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold value 100 in step S232 described later, and if it is less than or equal to the threshold value 100 (that is, 1 to 100). Is determined to set “16 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold is not less than 100 (that is, 101 to 251), it is determined that “17 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold value set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S1215A and S1215B to determine which value of the random number for variation pattern type determination. It is determined whether it is within the range of the determination value (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set. In step S232, the set variation pattern type is set. A determination table may be used to determine the range of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result to the variable category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines “00 (H)” to “09 (H)”, “10” as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 depending on which variation pattern type is determined in step S232. A process of setting any value of (H) "to" 18 (H) "to the EXT data of the variable category command is performed.

  In this embodiment, although the case where it is determined that the big win or the small win is determined in the determination at the time of winning, the range in which the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly determined is shown. When it is determined that the game is a big hit or a small hit, the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, when a big win or a small win is received, a symbol designating command indicating that the determination was made at the time of winning is transmitted, and a variation category command comprehensively indicating that the variation pattern type is a big hit or small winning may be transmitted. . For example, although the production control microcomputer 100 does not specifically show which variation pattern type, the variation indicated that it will be one of the big hit variation pattern types. Based on the reception of the category command, a notice effect such as hold, which will be described later, may be executed.

  23 and 24 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 56 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be made so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 21A) is data indicating “first”. (Step S52). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating “first” (that is, data indicating “second”) (N in step S52), the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol pointer (first Data indicating “second” is set in a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is performed for one special symbol or the special symbol process is performed for the second special symbol (step S53). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating “first” (Y in step S52), the CPU 56 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54). ).

  By executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, in this embodiment, the first special symbol changes in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls win the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Display or variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation display is executed in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Although the case where it is displayed is shown, you may comprise so that a variable display of any one of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol may be performed preferentially. In this case, for example, when the state is shifted to the high base state, it is easy to start winning at the second starting winning port 14 provided with the variable winning ball apparatus 15 and the second reserved memory is easily accumulated. The special symbol variation display may be executed with priority.

  In addition, when it is configured so that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority as described above, it is not necessary to store the winning order, so the reserved storage specific information storage shown in FIG. An area (pending specific area) is not required.

  In addition, when it is configured to give priority to the second special symbol variation display as described above, when the gaming state is a probability variation state, a short time state (high base state), or a big hit gaming state Makes a determination at the time of winning (pre-reading determination) only for the starting winning at the second starting winning opening 14, and does not make a determination at winning (pre-reading determination) for the starting winning at the first starting winning opening 13. Thus, it is desirable to make a determination at the time of winning (pre-reading determination) with respect to the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 only in the low base state. Specifically, in the first start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 20 (A), when step S1215A is completed, it is determined whether or not it is in a time-short state (specifically, whether or not a time-short flag is set). ), And whether or not a big hit game is being played (specifically, whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more). What is necessary is just to skip the process of S1216A-S1218B and to transfer to step S1219A. In such a case, a notice effect such as hold for the first hold memory is executed in spite of the fact that only the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the short time state (high base state). It is possible to prevent the big hit that exists in the first reserved memory from being stocked, and to prevent the aim of the big hit even with the second special symbol's variable display. can do. Further, in the case where the display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, when the game state is the normal state (low base state), the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 is Only the determination at the time of winning (pre-reading determination) may be performed, and the determination at the time of winning (pre-reading determination) may not be performed for the start winning of the second start winning port 14.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and in the reserved specific area and the first reserved memory buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved memory buffer are shifted. To do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1. In addition, the CPU 56 adds the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total reserved storage number = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3 and 4 in order. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1-8.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the current gaming state (step S60). In this case, when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a time-short state background designation command when only the time-short flag indicating the time-short state is set and the probability variation flag is not set. If neither the probability change flag nor the time reduction flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) is given. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the change of the special symbol is started, the background control command, the change pattern command, the display result specifying command, and the total pending storage number subtraction specifying command are sequentially set for each timer interrupt. It is transmitted to the computer 100. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A command for specifying the total pending storage number subtraction is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”, Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case where the first special symbol is the target and the case where the second special symbol is the target.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for determining the big hit that has been extracted in step S1215A of the first start opening switch passage processing or step S1215B of the second start opening switch passage processing and previously stored in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer. A random number is read and a big hit judgment is performed. The big hit determination module compares the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (see FIG. 8) determined in advance with the big hit determination random number, and if they match, executes the process of determining the big hit or the small hit It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes processing for determining big hits and determining small hits.

  The big hit determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is in a probable change state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the case where the gaming state is in a non-probable change state (a normal state or a short time state). Specifically, a jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the right side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance and the number of jackpot determination values are definitely changed. There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) set to be smaller than the hour big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. There is also.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be “probability big hit” or “sudden probability big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, after the jackpot game is over, it is reset when the next jackpot occurs.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the value of random R does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8D. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects a big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type (“normal jackpot”, “probability change”) corresponding to the value of the random number for random determination (random 1) stored in the random number buffer area. "Big hit" or "Sudden probability change big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type extracted in step S1215A of the first start port switch passing process or step S1215B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. The random number is read and the jackpot type is determined. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, “01” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is “probable variation jackpot”, “02” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, When the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” that is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of “1”, “3”, and “7”, which is a big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly promising big hit”, “1” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “normal big hit” is decided, “3” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol. If “probable big hit” is determined, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is determined first, and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on a random number for determining the big hit type. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9D as a table used to determine the variation pattern type from among a plurality of types. )) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S95). The time reduction flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state or the time reduction state, and is reset when the time reduction state is ended. Specifically, when it is determined to be “ordinary jackpot”, the time reduction flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game. Further, after the big hit game is over, the display is reset when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times). Even before the end of the predetermined number of fluctuation displays, the hourly flag is reset even when the next big hit occurs. If it is determined to be “probability big hit” or “suddenly probable big hit”, the probability variation flag is set and the time reduction flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game. When the next big hit occurs, the time reduction flag is reset together with the probability variation flag.

  If the time reduction flag is not set (N in step S95), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is 3 or more (step S96). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A for detachment as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. 10A) is selected (step S97). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the total pending storage number is 3 or more (Y in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for deviation as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. 135B (see FIG. 10B) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the time reduction flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is the probability change state or the time reduction state (in this embodiment, the time reduction state is always entered when the state is shifted to the probability change state. (See steps S169 and S170), if it is determined as Y in step S95, the CPU 56 may change the variation pattern type. As a table used to determine one of a plurality of types, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 10C) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state by executing the processes of steps S95 to S99, the losing variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 10A or FIG. ) Is selected as shown in FIG. In this case, non-reach CA2-2 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S100, which will be described later, and when the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-2 is determined, the process changes in step S102. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is normally cheerful, a change display of the shortened change may be performed.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the processing of steps S95 to S99 is executed, and the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storage is 3 or more, the failure shown in FIG. The change pattern type determination table for use 135B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is the probability changing state or the time-shortening state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S100, which will be described later, and when the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S102. A non-reach PA1-3 with a super shortening variation is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability change state or a short time state, or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, a change display of the ultrashort fluctuation may be performed. In this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table for ultra-shortening variation (see FIG. 10C) used in a probability variation state or a short-time state, and a variation pattern type determination table for ultra-shortening variation based on the number of reserved storages. Although the table is different from the table (see FIG. 10B), a common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for the ultrashort variation.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer) and selects it in the process of steps S92, S94, S97, S98 or S99. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S100).

  Next, the CPU 56 determines hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 11) as tables used for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S100. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 12) is selected (step S101). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S101. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S102). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 5 designation) (see FIG. 13) in accordance with the determined big hit type, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the big hit flag is set, if the type of big hit is “normal big hit”, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). Whether or not it is “ordinary big hit” can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. . Further, when the big hit type is “probability big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). Whether or not it is “probable big hit” can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. . When neither “normal big hit” nor “probability big hit” (that is, “sudden probability big hit”), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command (step S115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in Step S116), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S1121). Whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted is determined by, for example, transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command when transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command in step S1122 described later. It is sufficient to set whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is set, and whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is set in step S1121. Also, in this case, the set total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing, which will be described later, when the special symbol fluctuation display is terminated or when the big jackpot is terminated. do it.

  Next, if the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the total pending storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S1125). When the variable time timer times out (step S1126), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56, if it is set, the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state, the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state, and the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state. Is reset (step S132), and control for transmitting a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is “normal jackpot” or “probability jackpot”, a jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. Whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit” or “suddenly probable big hit” is data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer) Based on the determination.

  In addition, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the jackpot has occurred) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, “15 times in case of“ normal big hit ”or“ probable big hit ”, 2 times in case of“ suddenly promising big hit ”) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S135). . The round time per round in the big hit game is also set. Specifically, in the case of sudden probability change big hit, 0.1 seconds is set as the round time, and in the case of normal big hit or probability change big hit, 29 seconds is set as the round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the time-count counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time-saving state is 0 (step S137). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the time reduction counter by −1 (step S138). Then, when the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S140).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S142). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (time for notifying that the small hit has occurred, for example, in the effect display device 9) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S143). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S144). In addition, the opening time per time of the big winning opening in the small hit game is set. Specifically, 0.1 seconds which is the same as the round time for the sudden probability change big hit is set as the opening time for one big winning opening in the small hit game. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S145).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S141), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S146).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the big hit end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, when it is “ordinary big hit” or “probable big hit”, a big hit end designation command (command A301 (H)) is transmitted, and when it is “sudden probable big hit”, small hit / sudden probability big hit An end designation command (command A 302 (H)) is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed on the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer (step S164). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit that ends this time is a normal big hit (step S166). Whether or not it is “ordinary big hit” can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. . If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 56 sets the time reduction flag and shifts to the time reduction state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time reduction number counter (step S168).

  If it is not a normal big hit (that is, if the probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit), the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag to shift to the probability variation state (step S169) and sets the time reduction flag to shift to the time reduction state. (Step S170).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S171).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the special symbol stop process is started), the CPU 56 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal process. A process of setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms), and the like (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer in the form of a ring buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  33 and 34 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read out.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result specifying command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result specifying command (display result 1 specifying command to display result 5 specifying command) in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is one of the symbol designation commands (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received symbol designation command as the first free winning command storage area formed in the RAM. (Step S622).

  If the received effect control command is any variation category command (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation category command in each storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Of these, the latest symbol designating command is stored in the storage area (step S624).

  If the received effect control command is the first start prize designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received first start prize designation command in each start prize command storage area formed in the RAM. It stores in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and variable category command are stored in the storage area (step S626).

  If the received effect control command is the second start prize designation command (step S627), the effect control CPU 101 converts the received second start prize designation command into each start prize command storage area formed in the RAM. It stores in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and variable category command are stored in the storage area (step S628).

  If the received production control command is a combined pending storage number designation command (step S629), the production control CPU 101 uses the received aggregate pending storage number designation command for each start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Among the storage areas, the latest symbol designation command, variation category command, and start prize designation command (first start prize designation command, second start prize designation command) are stored in the storage area (step S630). Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores the total pending storage number designated by the total pending storage number designation command in the total pending storage number storage area provided in the RAM (step S631).

  If the received effect control command is a total pending memory count subtraction designation command (step S632), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the total pending memory count stored in the total pending memory count storage area (step S633). . Further, the effect control CPU 101 erases one hold display in the sum hold storage display unit 18c of the effect display device 9, shifts the remaining hold display one by one, and adds the sum hold storage in the sum hold storage display unit 18c. The number display is updated (step S634).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S635). For example, if the effect control command received is the first symbol variation designation command, the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set, and if the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command is set. Set the reception flag. Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a change pattern setting process such as a hold for setting a change pattern of a hold display or an active display in a notice effect such as a hold (step S800A).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control relating to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the effect symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. Then, when the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. If the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  Big hit end effect process (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the change pattern setting process (step S800A). In this embodiment, when performing a notice effect such as a hold, when a start prize is generated, in the change pattern setting process of a hold, etc. in step S800A, first, a rough change pattern (such as a start prize, each subsequent change display, And at which timing during the variable display of the notice target, a pattern for determining whether the hold display or active display is changed or to which special display mode is changed is determined. After that, at the start of each variable display or the target variable display, it is determined which action effect or the like is to be executed to change the hold display or active display. Control to change the display and active display.

  In the change pattern setting process for holding, etc., the effect control CPU 101 first sets a set of commands at the time of start winning (ie, symbol designating command, variable category command, start winning designating command (first start winning designating command or second start It is confirmed whether or not a new winning designation command) and a set of combined pending storage number designation commands have been received (step S6001). Specifically, one set of symbol designation command, variable category command, start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command), and total pending storage number designation command in the command prize storage area at the start prize Can be confirmed by determining whether or not is newly stored. If a command for starting winning a set is not newly received, the process is terminated as it is.

  If a command at the time of a start winning prize is newly received, the CPU 101 for effect control determines whether or not the on-hold announcement effect execution flag indicating that the on-hold announcement effect is already being executed is set. Is confirmed (step S6002). If the on-hold notification effect execution flag is set, the process proceeds to step S6010.

  By executing the processing of step S6002, in this embodiment, when a notice effect such as hold is already being executed, control is performed such that the notice effect such as hold is not determined repeatedly. In addition, it may be configured to be able to newly determine a notification effect such as a hold even during execution of a notification effect such as a hold, and to be able to execute a plurality of notification effects such as a hold simultaneously with a plurality of hold displays as a notification target. . In addition, for example, when a notice effect such as hold is already being executed, only the change pattern such as hold is determined at the time of starting winning, and then the hold notice pattern determined after the notice effect such as hold is ended. In accordance with the above, a new notice effect such as a hold may be executed.

  If the on-hold notice effect execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 causes the non-reach deviation of all the change categories up to the previous change category for the start winning newly generated this time. Whether or not (step S6003). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 extracts all the variation category commands that are stored in the start winning command storage area and that are immediately before the newly received variation category command this time, and that variation category It is confirmed whether or not the variation category indicated by the command is a non-reach deviation. In this embodiment, in the normal state, if the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is at least 1 to 99, it becomes non-reach. Any of -3 (see FIG. 13) can be determined to be non-reach. Further, in the case of the probability variation state or the short time state, if all the variation categories are the variation category 9 (see FIG. 16), it can be determined that all are non-reach. If there is at least one variation category that does not deviate from non-reach (ie, a variation category that reaches reach), the process proceeds to step S6010.

  By executing the processing of step S6003, in this embodiment, a notice effect such as a hold is executed on condition that all the variable categories up to one prior to the notice target are non-reachable. It is configured as possible. In addition, even if it is a case where what becomes reach is contained in the hold memory one before the notice target, it may be configured such that a notice effect such as hold can be determined.

  If all the previous variation categories are out of reach, the production control CPU 101 determines a change pattern such as a hold based on the latest variation category command received (step S6004). In step S6004, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on a random number by using a hold etc. change pattern determination table for determining a change pattern such as a hold, and determines a change pattern such as a hold.

  FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of a change pattern determination table for holding, etc. As shown in FIG. 37, in this embodiment, a determination value is assigned to each change pattern in the change pattern determination table for hold, etc., according to the total hold storage number, without notice effect. . In FIG. 37, since there are a large number of change patterns as change patterns such as a hold pattern, only representative change patterns are described, and the description of other change patterns is omitted. For example, as shown in FIG. 37, if the total pending storage number is 1, determination values are assigned to the no-notification effect, the change pattern P1-1, the change pattern P1-2,. . Further, for example, if the total number of pending storage is 4, there is no notice effect, change pattern P4-1, ... change pattern P4-m, ... change pattern P4-n, ... change pattern P4-s. The determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern P4-t and the change pattern P4-u. And, for example, if the total number of stored pending is 4, if there is no notice effect and the total of the determination values assigned to each change pattern is out of super reach, the winning determination result is K410 + K411 +. + K41m +... + K41n +... + K41s + K41t + K41u = 100% is assigned. Further, when the winning determination result is a super reach big hit, the determination value is assigned so that K420 + K421 +... + K42m +... + K42n +.

  In step S6004, the effect control CPU 101 determines, for example, whether the winning determination result is out of super reach or a super reach jackpot based on the received latest variation category command. For example, if the latest received variation category command is the variation category 8 command or the variation category 10 command, it can be determined that the winning determination result is out of super reach (see FIG. 16). For example, if the latest received variation category command is the variation category 23 command or the variation category 26 command, it can be determined that the winning determination result is a super reach jackpot (see FIG. 17). If neither the super reach loss nor the super reach jackpot is reached, the effect control CPU 101 determines not to execute the notice effect such as hold.

  If the determination result at the time of winning is out of super reach or a super reach big win, the production control CPU 101 specifies and specifies the total reserved memory number stored in the total reserved memory number storage area (see steps S631 and S633). One of the change patterns corresponding to the total pending storage number is determined. For example, when the total pending storage number is specified as 4, no notice effect is produced corresponding to the total pending storage number 4, change pattern P4-1, ... change pattern P4-m, ... change pattern P4. -N,..., Change pattern P4-s, change pattern P4-t, or change pattern P4-u is determined. In this case, if the determination result at the time of winning is out of super reach, the determination values of K410, K411, ..., K41m, ..., K41n, ..., K41s, K41t, and K41u corresponding to the super reach out Determine the change pattern according to the allocation. If the winning determination result is a super reach big hit, allocation of judgment values of K420, K421, ..., K42m, ..., K42n, ..., K42s, K42t, K42u corresponding to the super reach big hit. To determine the change pattern.

  In the above case, the total number of reserved storage is 4, and, for example, when the change pattern is determined without the notice effect, the case where it is decided not to execute the notice effect such as hold is shown.

  In addition, when the total number of reserved storage is 4, for example, when the change pattern P4-1 is determined, a start display is displayed in a normal mode (in this example, a white round display) at the time of start winning, and the start is started. In the first to third changes after winning a prize, the hold display is digested without changing the display form of the hold display in the normal mode (in this example, the white round display), which is the change target display 4 This shows a case in which a notice effect such as a hold is executed in a manner in which the active display changes to a blue round display in the special display mode at the time of change.

  Further, when the total number of reserved storage is 4, for example, when the change pattern P4-m is determined, the start display is displayed in the normal mode (in this example, a white round display) at the time of start winning, and the start is started. The hold display changes to the blue round display in the special display mode at the first change after winning, and the display form of the hold display remains the same as the blue round display at the second change. A mode in which the display mode of the hold display is changed to a green round display, the hold display is digested, and the active display is changed to a red round display in the special display mode at the fourth change which is a change target display. Shows a case where a notice effect such as hold is executed. Thus, even when a notice effect such as hold is executed, the display mode of the hold display does not always change every time, for example, it does not change like the second change of the change pattern P4-m. is there.

  In addition, when the total number of reserved storage is 4, and, for example, the change pattern P4-n is determined, the start display is indicated by a blue round display in the special display mode at the time of start winning, and after the start winning In the first variation, the display mode of the hold display remains the same as the blue round display, the display mode of the hold display changes to the green round display in the second variation, and the display mode of the hold display in the third variation Is changed to a red round display, the hold display is digested, and a notice effect such as hold is executed in a mode in which the active display remains the red round display at the fourth change which is the change display subject to notice. Is shown. Thus, the start display is not always started from the display of the hold display in the normal mode (in this example, the white round display), and the hold display is blue, for example, as in the change pattern P4-n. Sometimes it starts with a round display. In addition, the display mode of the active display does not necessarily change in the change display of the advance notice target. For example, as shown in the change pattern P4-n, the active display is performed in the change display of the advance notice by taking over the red circle display of the hold display. In some cases, after the display is displayed, the display mode of the active display does not change with the red round display in the variable display of the notice target.

  In this embodiment, in the change pattern determination table for holding or the like shown in FIG. 37, when the super reach big hit is performed, the notice effect such as holding is executed at a higher rate than when super reach is lost. A determination value is assigned so as to be determined (a change pattern other than a notice effect is determined). Further, in this embodiment, in the change pattern determination table for hold, etc. shown in FIG. 37, when the hold display or active display changes to a red round display, the ratio of the super reach big hit is the highest, and the green circle The determination value is assigned so that the ratio of the super reach big hit is the next highest when the display changes to the shape display, and the ratio of the super reach big hit becomes the lowest when the display changes to the blue round display. Therefore, in this embodiment, among the special display modes, the red round display has the highest expectation level (reliability) for the big hit, the green round display has the next highest expectation level (reliability) for the big hit, The blue circle display has the lowest expectation level (reliability) for the big hit.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the hold etc. change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37, even if the final change mode of hold display and active display is the same, depending on which hold etc. change pattern changes Judgment values are assigned so that the degree of expectation (reliability) for jackpots is different. For example, even when the final change mode is the same red round display, the change pattern P4-n that changes to the final red round display at an early stage (changes to the red round display at the third change) Is larger than the change pattern P4-m that changes to the final red round display at a later stage (changes to the red round display at the fourth change (that is, the change display of the notice target)). Judgment values are assigned so that the degree of expectation (reliability) for the is high. Note that the change pattern that changes to the final red round display at an early stage has a lower expectation (reliability) for the big hit than the change pattern that changes to the final red round display at a later stage. A determination value may be assigned to each.

  Further, in this embodiment, there are cases where the hold display and the active display are displayed as a special display mode in a mode imitating a treasure box. For example, when the total number of reserved memories is 4, and is determined to be any one of the change patterns P4-s to P4-u, the display of the hold display is started in a manner simulating a treasure box at the time of start winning. Next, in the 1st to 3rd changes after the start winning prize, the hold display is digested without changing the display mode of the hold display in the form imitating the treasure box, and the treasure box is displayed at the 4th change which is the change display of the notice target. In the active display of the imitated mode, a notice effect such as hold is performed in a mode in which the treasure box is opened and the treasure jumps out. In this embodiment, in the case of the change pattern P4-s, the treasure box is opened and the treasure A (for example, display of “chance”) pops out as a treasure in the change target display, and the change pattern P4- In the case of t, the treasure box is opened in the change display of the notice target, and the treasure B (for example, display of “Great Chance”, etc.) pops out as a treasure. In FIG. 5, a notice effect such as holding is executed in such a manner that the treasure box is opened and a treasure C (for example, a display such as “Intense heat”) pops out as a treasure.

  In this embodiment, when a hold display or active display is displayed in a manner simulating a treasure box and a notice such as hold is executed, the notice such as hold is executed according to the change pattern P4-u as a change pattern such as hold. The case where the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is the highest, and the case where the notice effect such as the hold is executed according to the change pattern P4-t, the next expectation (reliability) for the big hit is the highest, and according to the change pattern P4-s. The judgment value is assigned so that the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is the lowest when the notice effect such as holding is executed.

  In this embodiment, not only the change mode of the hold display of the advance notice target in each change display after the start winning prize (the change display before the advance notice object) is determined by determining the change pattern such as the hold in step S6004. Although the change mode of the active display in the variable display of the notice target is determined collectively, it is not limited to such a process mode. For example, in step S6004, only the change pattern indicating the change mode of the hold display of the advance notice target in each change display after the start winning prize (the change display before the advance notice target) is determined. It may be configured to determine when starting the variable display.

  When the execution of the hold notice effect is determined (Y in step S6005), the effect control CPU 101 stores the determined change pattern such as hold in the notice information storage area such as the hold provided in the RAM, The winning determination result (whether super reach is lost or super reach jackpot) corresponding to the reserved storage to be notified is stored (step S6006). Next, the effect control CPU 101 increments the hold display by one in the display mode indicated by the determined change pattern of hold, etc., in the summed hold storage display unit 18c of the effect display device 9, and adds up the summed hold in the summed hold storage display unit 18c. The stored number display is updated (step S6007). For example, when the determined change pattern such as hold is the change pattern P4-m, the normal hold display (in this example, white round display) is increased by one. Further, for example, when the determined change pattern such as hold is the change pattern P4-n, the hold display is increased by one in the blue round display in the special display mode.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a notice effect executing flag such as hold (step S6008). Next, the production control CPU 101 specifies the total reserved memory number stored in the total reserved memory number storage area (see steps S631 and S633), holds the value obtained by adding 1 to the specified total reserved memory number, etc. An effect number counter for counting the number of fluctuations during execution of the notice effect is set (step S6009). In step S6009, the value obtained by adding 1 to the total number of reserved storages is set in this embodiment, even after the notice target hold display is exhausted, it is held until the notice target change display ends. This is because the display mode of the active display may change due to the execution of the equal announcement effect (that is, 1 is added corresponding to the amount of the variable display of the notification target).

  On the other hand, when the flag for executing the notice effect such as holding is set (Y in step S6002), when there is even one variation category that does not deviate from non-reach (that is, the variation category that becomes reach) (N in step S6003). ), Or when it is decided not to execute the notice effect such as hold (N in Step S6005), the effect control CPU 101 uses the normal hold display (main book) in the combined hold storage display unit 18c of the effect display device 9. In the example, the white round display) is incremented by 1, and the total pending storage number display in the total pending storage display unit 18c is updated (step S6010).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  39 and 40 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8000). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read out in step S8000 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8001). If the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the chance stop symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) is used as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream in step S8001. The combination of symbols that do not reach reach and the symbol that is out of reach by one symbol is also determined. The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbols in the effect symbol display result storage area.

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 41, when the received display result designation command indicates “ordinary big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 stops. A combination of effect symbols in which three symbols are arranged in the same even number as symbols is determined. When the received display result designation command indicates “probable big hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses three symbols as stop symbols. A combination of performance symbols arranged with the same odd number of symbols is determined.

  Further, when the received display result designation command indicates “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as the stop symbol. In the case of “out of” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  In addition, as for the effect symbols, a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right are all the same symbols) is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol. In addition, a symbol reminiscent of being in a probabilistic state (in this embodiment, an odd symbol) is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and a symbol in recalling that it is not in a probable state (an even symbol in this embodiment) is a non-probable variable symbol. Also called.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs a predetermined display in the active display area 9 </ b> A of the effect display device 9 in the same display mode as the first hold display displayed on the summed hold storage display unit 18 c of the effect display device 9. Active display) is displayed (step S8002). For example, when the first hold display displayed in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is in a normal mode (in this example, a white round display), the active display area 9A has a white display as a predetermined display. Display a round display. Further, for example, when the first hold display displayed in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is a blue round display, a blue round display is displayed as a predetermined display in the active display area 9A. . Further, for example, when the first hold display displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c is a green round display, a green round display is displayed as a predetermined display in the active display area 9A. . For example, when the first hold display displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c is a red round display, a red round display is displayed as a predetermined display in the active display area 9A. . Further, for example, when the first hold display displayed in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is a display in a mode imitating a treasure box, the active display area 9A has a mode imitating a treasure box as a predetermined display. Display the display.

  In this embodiment, the command transmitted at the start of variation is the interval for each timer interrupt (4 ms interval) in the order of the background designation command, variation pattern command, display result designation command, and total pending memory count subtraction designation command. ) (See FIGS. 23 to 27). Accordingly, in the effect symbol variation start process executed at the stage of receiving up to the display result designation command, the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has not yet been received, and the pending display is not yet shifted and added up at the stage of step S8002. The hold display corresponding to the variable display to be started this time should still remain in the hold storage display unit 18c. Therefore, in step S8002, the first hold display (hold display corresponding to the variable display started this time) displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c is confirmed, and the active display is displayed in the same display mode. You are in control.

  In step S8002, after a predetermined display (active display) is displayed in the active display area 9A, a total pending storage number subtraction designation command is received at the next timer interrupt (after 4 ms), and 1 is added from the total pending storage display unit 18c. Since the first hold display is erased, when viewed from the player, it appears that the first hold display of the combined hold storage display portion 18c has shifted to the active display area 9A almost simultaneously.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the on-hold announcement production execution flag is set (step S8003). If the on-hold notice effect execution flag is not set (that is, if the on-hold notice effect is not being executed), the process proceeds to step S8011. If the on-hold notice effect execution flag is set (that is, if the on-hold notice effect such as on hold is being executed), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the effect number counter is 1. (Step S8004). If the value of the effect counter is not 1 (that is, if the change display before the notice target change display is started), the effect control CPU 101 performs the hold display with the change display that starts this time. It is confirmed whether or not there is a change (step S8005). Whether or not there is a change in the hold display in the variable display that starts this time is specifically determined by confirming the change pattern of the hold or the like stored in the notice storage effect area such as the hold (see step S6006). it can. For example, when the change pattern such as hold is the change pattern P4-m, it is determined that there is a change in the hold display if it is the first change or the third change after the start winning, and if it is the second change after the start winning, It can be determined that there is no change in the hold display (see FIG. 37). The number of changes after the start winning can be identified by confirming the value of the production counter. Further, for example, when the change pattern such as the hold is the change patterns P4-s to P4-u (patterns that display the hold display in a manner simulating a treasure box), the hold display is changed until the change target display is displayed. Therefore, in step S8005, it is determined that there is no change in the hold display. If there is no change in the hold display in the variable display started this time, the process proceeds to step S8011.

  If there is a change in the hold display in the variation display that starts this time, the effect control CPU 101 selects an effect presentation determination table for determining the type of the effect presentation according to the variation time of the variation display that starts this time (step) S8006). Note that the variation time of the variation display that starts this time can be specifically identified by confirming the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command read in step S8000. Further, in this embodiment, as described above, when a notice effect such as a hold is executed, the change display before the change display of the notice target is all non-reach (see step S6003). In this case, the variation pattern is any one of non-reach PA1-1 to PA1-3 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, in step S8006, if the specified fluctuation time is the fluctuation time of the super shortening fluctuation (2.0 seconds, in the case of the non-reach PA1-3 fluctuation pattern), the action effect determination table for the super shortening fluctuation is selected. . If the specified variation time is the variation time of the shortening variation (8.0 seconds, in the case of the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-2), the action effect determination table for the shortening variation is selected. If the specified variation time is a variation time of a normal variation (12.5 seconds, in the case of a variation pattern of non-reach PA1-1), the action effect determination table for normal variation is selected.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the action effect determination table selected in step S8006, and determines the type of action effect (step S8007). The “action effect” is an effect that is executed in such a manner that it acts on the hold display or the active display in some form when the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes, and the action effect is executed. Thus, it can be suggested that the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes.

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the action effect determination table. Among these, FIG. 42 (A) shows a specific example of the action effect determination table for the super shortening variation (variation time 2.0 seconds). FIG. 42 (B) shows a specific example of the effect presentation determination table for shortening variation (variation time 8.0 seconds). FIG. 42C shows a specific example of the effect presentation determination table for normal variation (variation time 12.0 seconds). Further, FIG. 42D shows a specific example of the action effect determination table for active display change used in step S8015 described later. The action effect determination table for changing the active display will be described later. As shown in FIG. 42, in this embodiment, the action effect determination table includes “change during shift”, “lightning effect effect”, “actual effect effect”, “character effect effect A”, and “hold change symbol”. Determination values are assigned to “action effects”, “character action effects B”, and “change after reach”.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the period during which the action effect is executed is largely divided into a change start time, a change middle period, and a change latter period. Is different. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, there are “shift change” and “lightning strike effect” as action effects that can be executed at the start of change, and “actual effect effect that can be executed during the middle of change” And “character action effect A”, and there are “pending change symbol effect”, “character effect effect B”, and “change after reach” (however, “change after reach”). Can be executed only when the display mode of the active display is changed, as will be described later).

  Note that “at the start of fluctuation” means, for example, a period from the start of fluctuation display to a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds), or a period from the start of fluctuation display to the transition to high-speed fluctuation. For example, it may be any form that can recognize the period from the start of the variable display to immediately after. In addition, the “mid-change period” means, for example, a period from the end of the period at the start of change to a predetermined period before the end of change (for example, 10 seconds) or the first effect design (for example, the left pattern). It is only necessary to be able to recognize that it is a middle period of variable display in some form, such as a period until the display is stopped and a period until reach occurs. The “late change period” refers to, for example, a period from the end of the change end period (for example, 10 seconds) to the end of change display or the first effect design (for example, the left pattern) being stopped and displayed. It is possible to recognize that it is the period after the variable display or the period immediately before the end in some form, such as the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display, the period from the occurrence of reach to the end of the variable display If it is.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a change pattern such as a hold display (for example, change patterns P4-s to P4-u shown in FIG. 37) that displays the hold display to be notified in a manner simulating a treasure box is used as it is. Since the display mode of the active display is changed by executing “treasure box opening effect” in the variable display of the notice target (see step S8013 described later), it is not included in the effect determination table shown in FIG. The “treasure box opening effect” is classified as an effect that is executed when the change starts.

  The “change during shift” is to change the display mode of the hold display or the active display of the notice object immediately at the timing of the shift of the hold display (start of the change display) without executing the action effect (accordingly) Strictly speaking, “change during shift” is not included in the action effect). In addition, the “lightning action effect” means that the effect display device 9 performs an effect effect in a manner such as a lightning strike on the notice target hold display or active display, and changes the notice display hold display or active display display form. It is something to be made. In addition, the “actual effect effect” is to change the display mode of the hold display or the active display of the notice target by executing the effect effect in such a manner that the movable member 78 is movable. Further, the “character action effect A” is to change the display mode of the hold display of the notice target by executing the action effect in such a manner that the character A acts on the hold display of the notice target in the effect display device 9. It is. Further, the “pending change symbol effect” means that the effect display device 9 executes the action effect in such a manner as to temporarily stop and display the hold change symbol that suggests that the hold display of the notice target changes. The display mode of the hold display is changed. Further, the “character action effect B” is to change the display mode of the notification target hold display by executing an action effect in such a manner that the character B acts on the hold display of the notification target in the effect display device 9. It is. Furthermore, the “change after reach” is to change the display mode of the active display at a predetermined timing after the occurrence of reach (for example, after 5 seconds have elapsed since the occurrence of reach) without performing the action effect ( Therefore, the “change after reach” is not strictly included in the action effect).

  In step S8007, the effect control CPU 101 specifies whether the winning determination result stored in the notice effect storage area for holding etc. (see step S6006) is out of super reach or super reach jackpot, and in step S8006. The type of action effect is determined based on the determination value assigned in accordance with the determined determination result at the time of winning using the action effect determination table selected in.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (A), when the action effect determination table for ultra-short variation (variation time 2.0 seconds) is used, whether the winning determination result is out of super reach or super reach big hit. Regardless of whether or not, the change at the start of the change is determined with a probability of 100%. In other words, since the variation display of the super shortening variation has a very short variation time and it is impossible to secure the effect period of the effect effect, the display mode of the hold display of the notice target is immediately changed at the timing of the hold display shift.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 42B and 42C, an action effect determination table for shortened fluctuation (change time of 8.0 seconds) and an action effect determination table for normal fluctuation (change time of 12.5 seconds) are provided. When used, “change at shift” and “lightning effect effect” at the start of change, “actual effect effect” and “character action effect A” in the middle of change, “hold change symbol effect effect” and “ It is determined as one of the “character action effects B”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 42 (B) and 42 (C), in the case of a super reach big hit, compared to the case where the super reach is lost, the “holding change symbol effect” in the latter half of the fluctuation. In addition, the rate at which “character action effect B” is determined is high. On the other hand, in the case of a super reach big hit, the rate at which “change at shift” and “lightning effect effect” are determined at the start of fluctuation is lower than when super reach is lost. . Therefore, in this embodiment, the action value is determined in the action effect determination table so that the expectation (reliability) for the big hit increases as the action effect is executed and the hold display changes in the second half of the variable display. Is allocated. In addition, not only in the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, when the action effect is executed at the start of change or at the middle of change and the hold display changes, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit is increased. It may be configured.

  In this embodiment, in the action effect determination table for normal fluctuation (variation time 12.5 seconds) shown in FIG. 42C, the shortened fluctuation (variation time 8.0 seconds) shown in FIG. 42B. Compared with the action effect determination table for use, the rate at which the “pending change symbol action effect” and “character action effect B” in the later stage of the change are determined is higher. Conversely, in the action effect determination table for normal fluctuation (variation time 12.5 seconds) shown in FIG. 42 (C), the action for shortening fluctuation (variation time 8.0 seconds) shown in FIG. 42 (B). Compared with the effect determination table, the ratio at which “change at shift” and “lightning effect effect” at the start of fluctuation are determined is lower. Therefore, in this embodiment, as the variation time becomes longer, the rate of change of the hold display is increased by the action effect being executed in the second half of the variation display. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment. For example, as the variation time becomes longer, the rate of change of the hold display is increased by the action effect being performed at the beginning of the variation or in the middle of the variation. Good.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not “change during shift” is determined in step S8007 (step S8008). If it is determined to be “change at shift”, the CPU 101 for effect control has the hold etc. stored in the notice effect storage area such as hold (see step S6006) in the summed hold storage display unit 18c of the effect display device 9. The pending display to be notified is changed to the display mode indicated by the change pattern, and the total pending storage number display in the total pending storage display unit 18c is updated (step S8009). For example, when the change pattern such as the hold is the change pattern P4-m and the change display to be started this time is the first change after the start winning prize, the hold display to be notified is changed from a white round display to a blue round display. To change. For example, when the change pattern such as the hold is the change pattern P4-m and the change display to be started this time is the third change after the start winning prize, the hold display to be notified is changed from the blue round display to the green circle. Change to shape display. Then, control goes to a step S8011.

  If the action effect type other than “change during shift” is determined (N in step S8008), the effect control CPU 101 displays a process table corresponding to the variation pattern and the action effect type determined in step S8007. Select (step S8010). Then, control goes to a step S8020.

  On the other hand, when the on-hold notice effect execution flag is not set (N in Step S8003), there is no change in the hold display (N in Step S8005), or when it is determined to be “change during shift” (Step S8009). In the case of executing the control), the effect control CPU 101 selects a normal process table (a process table without an effect effect) corresponding to the variation pattern (step S8011). Then, control goes to a step S8020.

  If the value of the effect number counter is 1 in step S8004 (Y in step S8004), the change display started this time is a change display subject to notice of the notice effect such as hold. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the active display displayed in the active display area 9A is a display imitating a treasure box (step S8012). If the active display is a display imitating a treasure chest, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern and the “treasure chest opening effect” (step S8013). In this case, for example, when the change pattern such as the hold is the change pattern P4-s, the process table corresponding to the action effect in which the treasure A (for example, display of “chance”) pops out as a treasure is selected. Further, for example, when the change pattern such as the hold is the change pattern P4-t, the process table corresponding to the action effect in which the treasure B (for example, the display of “big chance”) pops out as a treasure is selected. Further, for example, when the change pattern such as the hold is the change pattern P4-u, a process table corresponding to the operational effect of a mode in which a treasure C (for example, display of “hot heat”) pops out as a treasure is selected. Then, control goes to a step S8020.

  If the active display is a display other than a display imitating a treasure box (N in step S8012), the CPU for effect control 101 checks whether there is a change in the active display in the variable display that starts this time (step S8014). Note that whether or not there is a change in the active display in the variable display that starts this time is specifically determined by confirming a change pattern such as a hold stored in the hold notice effect storage area (see step S6006). it can. For example, when the change pattern such as hold is the change pattern P4-m, it is determined that there is a change in active display, and when it is the change pattern P4-n, it can be determined that there is no change in active display (see FIG. 37). ). If there is no change in active display in the variable display started this time, the process proceeds to step S8019.

  If there is a change in the active display in the variable display started this time, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the action effect determination table for the active display change, and determines the type of the effect effect (step) S8015). In step S8015, the effect control CPU 101 specifies whether the display result is out of place or a big hit based on the display result designation command stored in the display result command storage area (see step S618), and performs active display. The type of action effect is determined based on the determination value assigned according to the specified display result using the action effect determination table for change.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42D, when the action display determination table for changing the active display is used, “change at shift” and “lightning effect effect” at the start of the change, “Direction” or “Change after reach” in the latter half of the change. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42 (D), in the case of a big hit, the “actual effect effect” in the middle of the change and the “post-reach change” in the latter part of the change compared to the case of the loss. The rate at which is determined is high. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, the rate at which “change at shift” and “lightning effect effect” are determined at the start of fluctuation is lower than in the case of loss. Therefore, in this embodiment, the action value is determined in the action effect determination table so that the expectation (reliability) for the big hit increases as the action effect is executed and the active display changes in the latter half of the variable display. Is allocated. In addition, not only in the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, when the action display is executed at the start of the change or in the middle of the change and the active display changes, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit is increased. It may be configured.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42 (D), when the action display determination table for changing the active display is used, “change during shift” and “lightning effect display” at the start of fluctuation are determined. When the sum of the ratios is out of place, 30% + 30% = 60%, and even in the case of big hits, the ratio is relatively high, 20% + 20% = 40%. This is because, in this embodiment, the variable display of the notice target of the notice effect such as the hold results in a super reach loss or a super reach big hit, so the action effect is executed after the reach occurs or during the execution of the super reach effect. And the production becomes annoying instead. For this reason, in this embodiment, with regard to the variable display of the notice target, the effect of executing the action effect at the start of the fluctuation is increased to increase the rate of changing the active display. Further, even when the active display is changed in the middle of the change or in the latter part of the change, the “actual action effect” without the effect in the effect display device 9 or the active display is changed without any effect. Only “change after reach” can be executed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the notice display of the hold target for the advance notice is displayed, such as “change at shift” at the start of change, “lightning effect effect” at the start of change, and “actual effect effect” at the middle of change. There is a change mode that can be executed in common when the display mode is changed and when the display mode of the active display is changed. Further, it can be executed only when the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed, such as “character action effect A” in the middle of change and “hold change symbol action effect” or “character action effect B” in the later change period. There are variations. There is also a change mode that can be executed only when the display mode of the active display is changed, such as “change after reach” in the later stage of fluctuation.

  In this embodiment, the action effect determination table for determining the action effect when changing the hold display shown in FIGS. 42A to 42C and the active display shown in FIG. 42D are changed. In the action effect determination table for determining the action effect at the time of performing, the case where the allocation of the determination value is changed according to the determination result at the time of winning or the display result is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the action effect may be determined by assigning different determination values depending on how many stages the hold display or the active display has changed through a notice effect such as hold.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the display mode of the hold display or the active display is always changed if the action effect is executed is shown, but the hold display is not limited to such a mode and the action effect is executed. Alternatively, there may be a case where the active display does not change (when a so-called gas effect effect is executed). In the case where the so-called “effect effect” is configured to be executable, specifically, the determination process in step S8005 and the determination process in step S8014 are not necessary, and step S8007 or step is performed regardless of whether there is a change in the hold display or active display. The type of action effect in S8015 may be determined.

  Further, as described above, when the so-called gas effect effect is configured to be executable, the degree of expectation that the hold display and the active display change depends on the type of the effect effect (in other words, the ratio of the effect effect of the gas effect differs). ) May be configured as follows. In this case, for example, when the actor action effect is executed, the expectation that the hold display changes is higher than when the character action effect A is executed (in other words, the character action effect A is more useful. You may make it the ratio of the effect effect of a gasse higher than a physical effect effect). In addition, for example, when the action effect in the later stage of change is executed, the expectation that the hold display and the active display change is higher than when the action effect at the start of change or in the middle of change is executed ( In other words, it may be configured such that the action effect in the latter half of the fluctuation has a lower ratio of the effect effect of the gas.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not “change during shift” is determined in step S8015 (step S8016). If it is determined to be “change during shift”, the effect control CPU 101 in the active display area 9 </ b> A of the effect display device 9 holds the change pattern such as the hold stored in the notice effect storage area such as the hold (see step S <b> 6006). The active display is changed to the display mode indicated by (Step S8017). For example, when the change pattern such as the hold is the change pattern P4-1, the active display is changed from the white round display to the blue round display. For example, when the change pattern such as the hold is the change pattern P4-m, the active display is changed from the green round display to the red round display. Then, control goes to a step S8019.

  If the action effect type other than “change during shift” is determined (N in step S8016), the effect control CPU 101 displays a process table corresponding to the variation pattern and the action effect type determined in step S8015. Selection is made (step S8018). Then, control goes to a step S8020.

  On the other hand, when there is no change in the active display (N in step S8014) or when it is determined to be “change during shift” (when step S8017 is executed), the effect control CPU 101 performs normal operation according to the variation pattern. A process table (a process table with no action effect) is selected (step S8019). Then, control goes to a step S8020.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in steps S8010, S8011, S8013, S8018, and S8019 (step S8020).

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 in accordance with the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbols is described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 43 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  In the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated in accordance with the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  In addition, it may be configured to be able to execute a notice effect (so-called notice effect for the change) other than the pre-read notice effect (in this example, a notice effect such as holding) during the change display of the effect symbol. When it is determined to execute the notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the decided notice effect in steps S8010, S8011, S8013, S8018, and S8019.

  In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), effects device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, effect component as an effect component) Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27 as a production component is executed (step S8021). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the effect symbol is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8022).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 starts the command (design designation command, variable category command, start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second command) stored in the storage area of the start prize command storage area. One start winning command stored in the first storage area is deleted, and the content of the start winning command storage area is shifted. (Step S8023).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8024).

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 first decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step S8101) and decrements the value of the variation time timer by 1 (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the action effect execution timing is reached (step S8106). Whether or not it is the execution timing of the action effect can be specifically determined by checking the value of the variable time timer set in step S8022. If it is the execution timing of the action effect, the effect control CPU 101 is stored in a notice effect storage area such as a hold (see step S6006) in the combined hold storage display unit 18c or the active display area 9A of the effect display device 9. Control is performed to change the hold display or active display to be notified to the display mode indicated by the change pattern such as hold (step S8107).

  In step S8107, for example, in the case where the hold display to be notified is changed, the change pattern such as hold is the change pattern P4-m, and the running change display is the first change after the start winning, The hold display subject to notice is changed from a white round display to a blue round display. Further, for example, when the change pattern such as the hold is the change pattern P4-m and the running change display is the third change after the start winning prize, the hold display to be notified is changed from the blue round display to the green circle. Change to shape display.

  Further, for example, when the active display is changed and the change pattern such as the hold is the change pattern P4-1, the active display is changed from the white round display to the blue round display. For example, when the change pattern such as the hold is the change pattern P4-m, the active display is changed from the green round display to the red round display. In addition, for example, when the change pattern such as the hold is the change pattern P4-s, a display in which the treasure A (for example, display of “chance”) jumps out as a treasure from a display imitating a treasure box as an active display. To change. In addition, for example, when the change pattern such as the hold is the change pattern P4-t, the treasure B (for example, a display such as “Large Chance”) jumps out as a treasure from a display imitating a treasure box as an active display. Change to display. Further, for example, when the change pattern such as the hold is the change pattern P4-u, the treasure C (for example, display such as “Intense heat”) jumps out as a treasure from a display imitating a treasure box. Change to display.

  Note that in step S8107, the specific timing for changing the display mode of the hold display or the active display of the notice target may be the end timing of the action effect or the timing during execution of the action effect. However, it may be changed with the start of the action effect (these timings may be properly used according to the type of action effect).

  Further, when “change after reach” is determined in step S8015 of the effect symbol variation start process, strictly speaking, the active display is changed without the execution of the action effect, so the reach is generated in step S8106. It is determined whether or not a later predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds after the occurrence of reach) is reached, and the display mode of the active display is changed based on the determination that the predetermined timing after the occurrence of reach has been reached. You can do it. In this case, the display mode of active display may be changed simultaneously with the occurrence of reach.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S8108), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S8109).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first performs control to erase the active display displayed in the active display area 9A (step S8300). In this embodiment, the active display is erased every time the variable display is finished. However, when the variable display is finished, at least one hold display is displayed on the total hold storage display unit 18c. If so, the active display may be continuously displayed in the active display area 9A.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8306. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, since the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S8306.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (out of symbol, jackpot symbol) (step S8302).

  Next, when neither the big winning symbol nor the small winning symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the presentation control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8312. To do.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S8304). In addition, if set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the on-hold notification effect execution flag or the effect number counter (step S8305).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not any jackpot start designation command has been received (step S8306). Whether or not any jackpot start designation command has been received is specifically determined by a flag indicating that the jackpot start designation command set in the command analysis process has been received (a jackpot start designation command reception flag), This determination can be made by checking whether or not a flag indicating that a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag) is set. If any jackpot start designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8307) and selects a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S8308). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8309), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) Control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, the various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1 and the movable member control data 1) (step S8310). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8311).

  When it is determined that neither big hit nor small win is made (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a notice effect execution flag such as hold is set (step S8312). ). If a notice effect execution flag such as hold is set, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect count counter (step S8313), and whether the value of the effect count counter after subtraction is 0 or not. Is confirmed (step S8314). If the value of the effect number counter after subtraction is 0, the effect control CPU 101 resets the on-hold notice effect execution flag such as hold (step S8315). Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8316).

  Next, a specific example of an effect mode of a notice effect such as a hold will be described. FIG. 46 and FIG. 47 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect mode of a notice effect such as a hold. In FIGS. 46 and 47, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

  First, as shown in FIG. 46 (1), it is assumed that a start-up prize is newly generated when the effect display device 9 is executing the variable display of the left middle right effect symbol. In this example, it is assumed that the start-up prize is newly generated in the state where the total number of reserved storage is 3, and the total number of stored pending memory is increased to four. Also, in this example, it is assumed that all the previous hold memories are non-reachable, and the change pattern P4-m is used as a change pattern such as hold based on the total number of hold memories being 4. Assume that it has been determined (see steps S6003 and S6004). Further, based on the determination of the change pattern P4-m as the change pattern such as the hold, the hold display in the normal mode (in this example, the white round display) as the fourth hold display for the newly increased hold memory. Is increased by one (see step S6007; see FIG. 37). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 46 (2), the variable display of the effect symbol is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one hold display is digested, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 46 (3). In the example shown in FIG. 46 (3), when the change display is started, the change pattern P4-m is determined as the change pattern such as the hold, so it is determined that there is a change in the hold display (see step S8005). (Refer to step S8007). Since the “lightning effect effect” is an effect effect at the start of fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 46 (3), the effect display device 9 responds to the pending display of the notice target during the period of the fluctuation start. The effect that the lightning 200 has fallen is performed (see steps S8010, S8021, and S8105), and the on-hold display to be notified is changed from the white round display to the blue round display (see step S8107). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG.

  Next, one hold display is digested, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 46 (5). In the example shown in FIG. 46 (5), when the change display is started, the change pattern P4-m is determined as the change pattern such as the hold, so it is determined that there is no change in the hold display (see step S8005). Reference)), the change display of the effect symbol is executed without changing the display mode of the action effect and the hold display. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG.

  Then, one hold display is digested, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 46 (7). In the example shown in FIG. 46 (7), when the change display is started, the change pattern P4-m is determined as the change pattern such as the hold, so it is determined that there is a change in the hold display (see step S8005). (Refer to step S8007). Since the “acting effect effect” is an effect effect in the middle of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 46 (8), the movable member 78 is part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the middle period of the change. An effect of a mode of moving in such a manner as to be covered is performed (see steps S8010, S8021, and S8105), and the hold display to be notified is changed from the blue round display to the green round display (see step S8107). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 46 (9), the variable display of the effect symbol is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Then, one hold display is digested, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 46 (10). In this case, since the variable display that is started this time is a variable display that is the target of the preliminary announcement effect such as the hold, the active display area takes over the display mode when it is displayed as the hold display on the combined hold storage display unit 18c. In 9A, a green round display is displayed as an active display (see step S8002).

  In the example shown in FIG. 46 (10), when the change display is started, the change pattern P4-m is determined as the change pattern such as the hold, so that it is determined that the active display has changed (see step S8014). 37), it is assumed that “change after reach” is determined as the type of action effect (see step S8015). Since the “change after reach” is strictly performed in the latter half of the fluctuation without performing the action effect, as shown in FIG. 47 (11), the predetermined change after the occurrence of the reach occurs in the latter half of the fluctuation. (For example, 5 seconds after the occurrence of reach), the active display is changed from the green round display to the red round display (see step S8107). After that, when it develops into a super reach effect and the variable display time ends, the variable display of the effect symbol is ended in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 47 (12). In the example shown in FIG. 47 (12), a big hit symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols “777”) is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the production symbol based on the variable display that is a super reach big hit. The case to be shown is shown.

  FIGS. 48 and 49 are explanatory diagrams showing other examples of effects of a notice effect such as a hold. 48 and 49, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

  First, as shown in FIG. 48 (1), it is assumed that a start-up prize is newly generated when the effect display device 9 is executing the variable display of the left middle right effect symbol. In this example, it is assumed that the start-up prize is newly generated in the state where the total number of reserved storage is 3, and the total number of stored pending memory is increased to four. Also, in this example, it is assumed that all the previous hold memories are non-reachable, and the change pattern P4-m is used as a change pattern such as hold based on the total number of hold memories being 4. Assume that it has been determined (see steps S6003 and S6004). Further, based on the determination of the change pattern P4-m as the change pattern such as the hold, the hold display in the normal mode (in this example, the white round display) as the fourth hold display for the newly increased hold memory. Is increased by one (see step S6007; see FIG. 37). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 48 (2), the variable display of the effect symbol is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one hold display is digested, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 48 (3), when the change display is started, the change pattern P4-m is determined as the change pattern such as the hold, so it is determined that there is a change in the hold display (see step S8005). It is assumed that “character action effect A” is determined as the type of action effect (see step S8007). Since “character action effect A” is an effect effect in the middle of fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 48 (4), the character A 201 displays the hold target for the notice target in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. The effect of pointing is performed (see steps S8010, S8021, and S8105), and the on-hold notification display is changed from the white round display to the blue round display (see step S8107). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 48 (5), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbol.

  Next, one hold display is digested, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 48 (6), when change display is started, the change pattern P4-m is determined as the change pattern such as hold, so it is determined that there is no change in the hold display (see step S8005). Reference)), the change display of the effect design is executed without changing the display mode of the action effect and the hold display. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 48 (7), the variable display of the effect symbol is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Then, one hold display is digested, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 48 (8), when the change display is started, the change pattern P4-m is determined as the change pattern such as the hold, so it is determined that there is a change in the hold display (see step S8005). It is assumed that “pending change symbol action effect” is determined as the type of action effect (see step S8007). Then, since the “holding change symbol effect” is an effect effect of the later stage of change, as shown in FIG. 48 (9), after the left and right effect designs are temporarily stopped and displayed during the later period of change, An effect is made such that the hold change symbol 202 is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol in the middle (see steps S8010, S8021, and S8105), and the hold indication to be notified is changed from the blue circle display to the green circle display. (See step S8107). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 48 (10), the variable display of the effect symbol is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one hold display is digested, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 49 (11). In this case, since the variable display that is started this time is a variable display that is the target of the preliminary announcement effect such as the hold, the active display area takes over the display mode when it is displayed as the hold display on the combined hold storage display unit 18c. In 9A, a green round display is displayed as an active display (see step S8002).

  In the example shown in FIG. 49 (11), when the change display is started, the change pattern P4-m is determined as the change pattern such as the hold, so it is determined that there is a change in the active display (see step S8014). 37)), it is assumed that “actual effect production” is determined as the type of action production (see step S8015). Since the “actual effect effect” is an effect effect in the middle of change, the movable member 78 is part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the change middle period as shown in FIG. 49 (12). An effect of moving in such a manner as to be covered is performed (see steps S8018, S8021, and S8105), and the active display is changed from the green round display to the red round display (see step S8107). As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 46 (8) and 49 (12), the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed and the display mode of the active display is changed. There is a kind of action effect that can be executed in common (in this example, “act effect effect”). After that, when it develops into a super reach effect and the variable display time ends, as shown in FIG. 49 (13), the variable display of the effect symbol is ended in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 49 (13), a big hit symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols “777”) is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the production symbol based on the variable display that is a super reach big hit. The case to be shown is shown.

  FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing still another example of the effect mode of the notice effect such as holding. In addition, in FIG. 50, the aspect of an effect screen changes in order of (1) (2) (3).

  First, as shown in FIG. 50 (1), it is assumed that a start winning is newly generated when the effect display device 9 is executing the variable display of the left middle right effect symbol. In this example, it is assumed that the start-up prize is newly generated in the state where the total number of reserved storage is 3, and the total number of stored pending memory is increased to four. Also, in this example, it is assumed that all the previous hold memories are non-reachable, and the change pattern P4-u is changed as a hold change pattern based on the total number of hold memories being 4. Assume that it has been determined (see steps S6003 and S6004). Further, it is assumed that the display 203 imitating a treasure box is increased by one as the fourth hold display for the newly increased hold memory based on the determination of the change pattern P4-u as the change pattern such as hold ( (See step S6007. See FIG. 37). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 50 (2), the variable display of the effect symbol is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one hold display is digested, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 50 (3), when changing display is started, the change pattern P4-u is determined as the change pattern such as hold, so it is determined that there is no change in the hold display (see step S8005). Reference)), the change display of the effect design is executed without changing the display mode of the action effect and the hold display. Thereafter, when a notice effect such as hold is executed according to the change pattern P4-u displaying the display 203 imitating the treasure box as the hold display, the display mode of the hold display does not change until the change display of the notice target. As shown in 50 (4), the change display up to the previous one of the change display of the advance notice object is finished while the display 203 imitating the treasure box is displayed as the hold display of the advance notice object.

  Next, one hold display is digested, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. In this case, since the variable display that is started this time is a variable display that is the target of the preliminary announcement effect such as the hold, the active display area takes over the display mode when it is displayed as the hold display on the combined hold storage display unit 18c. In 9A, a display imitating a treasure chest is displayed as an active display (see step S8002). Since the display imitating the treasure box is displayed as the active display, the “treasure box opening effect” that is the effect at the start of the change is executed as it is (see steps S8013, S8021, S8105), and the active display is the treasure box. The display is changed to a display in which the treasure box is opened and the treasure C (in this example, a display such as “Intense heat”) pops out as a treasure (see step S8107). After that, when it develops into a super reach effect and the variable display time ends, as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 50 (6), a big hit symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols “777”) is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the production symbol based on the variable display that is a super reach big hit. The case to be shown is shown.

  In this embodiment, as a hold or other change pattern for displaying a hold display or an active display in a manner simulating a treasure box, a “treasure box opening effect effect” is executed, and the treasure box is opened and “chance” or “ Although the case where an effect of a mode in which a display such as “Large Chance” and “Intense Heat” is executed is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, an effect may be performed in which a plurality of types of images simulating coins or jewels are displayed as treasures, or the display mode of the active display is blue or green rather than the treasure box being opened and treasure popping out. The display mode may be changed to any one of a plurality of display modes such as red. In this case, for example, an effect in which the display of “chance” pops out as a treasure shown in this embodiment is replaced with an effect in which the display mode of active display is changed to a blue round display. The effect in which the “chance” display jumps out is replaced with an effect that changes the display mode in the active display to a green round display, and the effect in the mode in which the “hot” display jumps out as a treasure. May be replaced with an effect of changing the display mode to a red round display.

  In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 50, examples of “change during shift” and “character action effect B” are omitted, but in the case of “change during shift”, the action effect is not executed. The display mode of the hold display or the active display to be notified is immediately changed at the timing of the hold display shift (start of the variable display). In the case of “character action effect B”, for example, in the same period or similar manner as in FIG. 48 (4), the character B points to the hold display to be notified on the effect display device 9 during the middle period of change. The effect of such a mode is performed, and the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed.

  Next, the execution timing of the action effect in the notice effect such as hold will be described. 51 and 52 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution timing of the action effect in the notice effect such as holding. Among these, FIG. 51 shows the execution timing of the effect effect executed in the variable display before the variable display of the notice target of the notice effect such as the hold. FIG. 52 shows the execution timing of the action effect executed in the variable display of the notice target of the notice effect such as holding.

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the change display before the change display of the notice target, “change at shift”, “lightning effect effect”, “actual effect effect”, “character effect effect A”, “hold change” By executing “symbol action effect” or “character action effect B”, it is possible to change the display mode of the hold display to be notified. As shown in FIG. 51, in the case of “change at the time of shift”, strictly speaking, the display of the hold display for the advance notice is immediately performed at the timing of the shift of the hold display (start of the variable display) without performing the action effect. Aspect changes (categorized at the beginning of variation). In addition, in the case of “lightning strike effect”, the lightning strike effect is executed during the period when the change starts, and the display mode of the hold display for the notice target changes.

  In addition, in the case of the “acting effect effect”, the acting effect effect is executed during the middle period of change, and the display mode of the hold display for the notice target changes. Further, in the case of “character action effect A”, the character action effect A is executed during the middle period of change, and the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, even if the effect effect is executed during the same mid-variation period, the “actual effect effect” is executed at an earlier timing than the “character effect effect A”. This is an effect. In addition, not only in the mode shown in this embodiment, if it is an action effect that is executed during the same mid-variation period, for example, the “actual effect effect” and the “character effect effect A” are completely You may comprise so that presentation timing may be the same, and you may comprise so that a part of presentation period may be common.

  Further, in the case of “pending change symbol action effect”, the hold change symbol action effect is executed in the later period of the change, and the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes. Further, in the case of “character action effect B”, the character action effect B is executed in the later period of the change, and the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, even if the effect is executed during the same late period, “Character effect B” is earlier than “Pending change symbol effect”. This is an effect that is executed. In addition, not only in the mode shown in this embodiment, if it is an action effect that is executed in the same period of the latter period of change, for example, the “hold change symbol effect effect” and the “character effect effect B” are completely effect periods. Or the production timing may be the same, or the production period may be partially shared.

  As shown in FIG. 52, “change at shift”, “lightning strike effect”, “treasure box opening effect”, “actual effect effect”, or “change after reach” is executed in the change display of the notice target. Thus, the display mode of the active display can be changed. As shown in FIG. 52, in the case of “change during shift”, the display mode of the active display immediately changes at the timing of the hold display shift (start of the variable display) without strictly performing the action effect. (Classified at the start of fluctuation) In addition, in the case of “lightning action effect”, the lightning effect effect is executed during the period when the change starts, and the display mode of the active display changes. In the case of “treasure box opening effect”, the treasure box effect is executed in the period when the change starts, and the display mode of the active display changes. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, it is assumed that the “treasure box opening effect” effect period is included in the “lightning strike effect effect” effect period. It should be noted that the production period and the production timing are not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, and the production period and production timing are “lightning effect production” and “treasure box production production” as long as the production is performed during the same fluctuation start period. They may be different, or conversely, the production period and production timing may be the same.

  In addition, in the case of the “acting effect effect”, the acting effect effect is executed during the middle period of change, and the display mode of the active display changes. Further, in the case of “change after reach”, the active display is performed at a predetermined timing after the occurrence of the reach (for example, 5 seconds after the occurrence of the reach) in the later period of the fluctuation without strictly providing an effect. The display mode changes.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, a plurality of types of variable display times (in this example, the non-reach fluctuation time is a fluctuation time of 12.5 seconds for a normal fluctuation and a fluctuation time of a shortening fluctuation of 8 seconds. Variable display time is executed for any variable display time of 0.0 second and a variation time of 2.0 seconds of ultrashort variation. Further, based on the determination result at the time of winning, it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display (in this example, an action effect in a notice effect such as hold). And when variable display is executed over a short variable display time of a plurality of types of variable display times, and when variable display is executed over a long variable display time of a plurality of types of variable display times. The number of timings at which the effects can be executed is different (in this example, as shown in FIG. 42A, in the change display of the ultrashort change, only the “change at shift” at the start of the change can be executed. As shown in B) and (C), in the fluctuation display of the shortened fluctuation and the normal fluctuation, it is possible to execute an effect effect in the middle of the fluctuation or in the latter half of the fluctuation in addition to the start of the fluctuation). Therefore, since the timing at which the change effect is executed changes according to the variable display time, the effect of the change effect can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when variable display is executed over a long variable display time of a plurality of types of variable display times, variable display is executed over a short variable display time of the plurality of types of variable display times. The number of timings at which a change effect can be executed is greater than when the change effect is performed (in this example, as shown in FIG. 42A, in the change display of the ultrashort change, “change at shift” at the start of change) As shown in FIGS. 42B and 42C, in the fluctuation display of the shortened fluctuation and the normal fluctuation, the action effect in the middle of the fluctuation or in the latter half of the fluctuation can be executed in addition to the start of the fluctuation). Therefore, if the variable display time is long, the timing at which the change effect is executed increases, so that the effect of the change effect can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the timing at which the change effect can be executed is small only in the case of the variable display time of the ultrashort change (in this example, only “change at shift” at the start of change can be executed). Although shown, it is not limited to such a response. For example, as the variable display time becomes shorter as normal fluctuation (12.5 seconds) → shortening fluctuation (8.0 seconds) → super-shortening fluctuation (2.0 seconds), the number of timings at which the change effect can be executed stepwise. You may comprise so that it may become less.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the types of change effects that can be executed during a specific period during the execution of variable display differ according to the variable display time (in this example, as shown in FIG. 42A). In the fluctuation display of the ultrashort fluctuation, only “change at the time of shift” can be executed at the start of the fluctuation, and as shown in FIGS. 42B and 42C, the fluctuation display of the short fluctuation and the normal fluctuation is “shift” at the start of the fluctuation. In addition to “time change”, “lightning effect production” can be executed). Therefore, since the type of change effect changes according to the variable display time, the effect of change effect can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the change pattern of the display mode of the hold display (in this example, the hold change pattern shown in FIG. 37) is determined based on the determination result at the time of winning, and variable display is started. The change effect is determined according to the determined change pattern, and the change effect can be executed based on the determination result (in this example, the change pattern such as the hold is determined at the start winning, and then the change is started. The action effect can be determined using the action effect determination table shown in FIG. 42, and the action effect can be executed to change the display mode of the hold display for the notice target). That is, in this embodiment, a rough change pattern such as a hold is determined when a start winning occurs, and then a change mode such as what action effect is executed at the start of each variable display is determined. Yes. Therefore, it is possible to execute a change effect according to the situation. For example, depending on whether the variation time in the variation display is long or short, it is possible to change the display mode of the hold display by executing an effect or the like according to the variation display time.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, it is possible to display a specific display (in this example, a hold display, an active display) corresponding to the variable display, and the display mode of the specific display based on the determination result of the winning determination It is possible to execute a change effect (an effect effect in a notice effect such as hold) in this example. Also, different types of change effects are produced when the variable display that is the determination target of the winning determination is executed and when the variable display that is the determination target of the winning determination is executed. (In this example, as shown in FIG. 42D, when the display mode of the active display is changed, “change at shift” at the start of change, “lightning action effect,“ While the “actual effect effect” and “change after reach” in the later stage of change can be executed, as shown in FIGS. 42 (A) to (C), the display mode of the hold display of the notice target is changed. In this case, “change at shift” or “lightning effect effect” at the start of change, “actual effect effect” or “character effect effect A” in the middle of change, “hold change symbol effect effect” or “character” Action effect B ”can be executed). Therefore, the type of change effect differs between when the variable display that is the determination target is executed and when the variable display before the variable display that is the determination target is executed. Can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the variable display that is the determination target of the winning determination is executed, and when the variable display before the variable display that is the determination determination of the winning is executed Thus, there is a change effect that can be executed in common (in this example, as shown in FIG. 42, “shift” is used when the display mode of the active display is changed and when the display mode of the hold display of the notice target is changed. “Time change”, “Lightning effect production” and “Function effect production” can be executed in common). Therefore, the change effect can be easily understood.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the change effect that can be executed only when the variable display that is the determination target of the winning determination is executed, and the variable that is before the variable display that is the determination target of the winning determination. There is a change effect that can be executed only when the display is executed (in this example, as shown in FIG. 42, there is a “change after reach” that can be executed only when the display mode of the active display is changed, There are “character action effect A”, “hold change symbol effect” and “character action effect B” that can be executed only when the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed). Therefore, the effect of changing effects can be further improved.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of change effects having different advantages (in this example, as shown in FIG. 42, “holding change symbol effect effect” or “character effect” in the latter half of the fluctuation) Expectation (reliability) for the big hit is high in the case of “Production B” and “Change after reach”, and in the case of “Change at shift” at the start of fluctuation and “Lightning effect production”, the expectation for the big hit (Reliability) ) Is lower). Therefore, the expectation with respect to the kind of change effect can be raised.

  In this embodiment, the case where the degree of advantage is different by changing the degree of expectation (reliability) with respect to the big hit is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the degree of advantage may be made different by changing the degree of expectation (reach reliability) for reach in the variable display of the notice target, or the degree of benefit by changing the degree of expectation (probability change reliability) for the probability variation big hit May be different.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment, after making it possible to decide to change the production mode at a plurality of change timings and determining the production mode and the final production mode when starting the predetermined production The change mode of the production mode may be determined based on the determined production mode at the start and the final production mode. Hereinafter, a second embodiment for determining the change mode of the production mode based on the production mode at the start and the final production mode will be described.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of portions that perform the same configuration and processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and portions that are different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In this embodiment, instead of the command reception buffer, a first start prize command buffer and a second start prize command buffer are provided. Moreover, it replaces with the total pending | holding memory | storage number display part 18c, and is provided with the 1st start winning memory | storage display area 5HL and the 2nd starting winning memory display area 5HR.

  In this embodiment, the start winning command buffer corresponds to the start winning command storage area shown in the first embodiment. In addition, the first start opening prize designation command and the second start opening prize designation command correspond to the first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command described in the first embodiment, respectively. The active display area AHA corresponds to the active display area 9A shown in the first embodiment.

  In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) executes a winning effect determining process in the effect control process. FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a winning effect determination process in the second embodiment. This winning effect determination process is a process of determining an effect mode of a predetermined effect (display color change effect).

  In the winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 53, the effect control CPU 101 first checks the stored contents of the first start winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer (step S901), and receives a new received command ( It is determined whether or not a start winning command is newly stored in the starting winning command buffer (step S902).

  When there is no new reception command (step S902; NO), the effect control CPU 101 ends the winning effect determining process. On the other hand, when there is a new reception command (step S902; YES), the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not the new reception command is the first start opening prize designation command (step S903).

  When the new reception command is the first start opening winning designation command (step S903; YES), the effect control CPU 101 performs a winning / active display color determination process in FIG. 1 (step S904). The display color determination process at the time of winning / active is performed in the form of display when the predetermined effect (display color change effect) is started (at the time of winning) (display in the display color at the holding position displayed at the time of winning) This is a process of determining a production mode (display in the display color in the active display area AHA). In the following description, the display color at the hold position displayed at the time of winning is expressed as the display color at winning, and the display color at the time of the active display area AHA.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs a change mode determination process in FIG. 1 (step S905). This change mode determination process is a process of determining the change mode of the production mode based on the determined production mode and the final production mode.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs a hold addition process for displaying a hold display in the first start-winning memory display area 5HL with the display color at the time of winning determined by the display color determination process at the time of winning / active (step S906). The winning effect determination process is terminated.

  Returning to step S903, if the new received command is not the first start opening prize designation command (step S903; NO), it is determined whether or not the new received command is the second start opening prize designation command (step S907). If the new received command is not the second start opening winning designation command (step S907; NO), the process is terminated.

  When the new reception command is the second start opening winning designation command (step S907; YES), the effect control CPU 101 performs a winning / active display color determination process in FIG. 2 (step S908).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs a change mode determination process in FIG. 2 (step S909). Then, the production control CPU 101 performs a hold addition process for displaying the hold display in the second start-winning storage display area 5HR with the display color at the time of winning determined by the display color determining process at the time of winning / active (step S906). The winning effect determination process is terminated.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the display color determination process at the time of winning / active executed in steps S904 and 908 of FIG. In the winning / active display color determination process, the effect control CPU 101 performs processing with reference to the color determination table based on the EXT data in the variable category command. Details of the color determination table will be described after the description of this flowchart.

  First, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the EXT data in the variation category command indicates non-reach (loss) (step S521). When the EXT data in the variation category command indicates non-reach (loss) (step S521; YES), the effect control CPU 101 sets the color determination table TBL-HA as a color determination table for determining the display color. (Step S522), the process proceeds to step S532.

  When the EXT data in the variable category command does not indicate non-reach (loss) (step S521; NO), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the EXT data in the variable category command indicates normal reach (loss). (Step S523). When the EXT data in the variation category command indicates normal reach (loss) (step S523; YES), the effect control CPU 101 sets the color determination table TBL-HB as a color determination table for determining the display color. (Step S524), the process proceeds to step S532.

  When the EXT data in the variable category command does not indicate normal reach (lost) (step S523; NO), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the EXT data in the variable category command indicates super reach (lost). (Step S525). When the EXT data in the variable category command indicates super reach (loss) (step S525; YES), the effect control CPU 101 sets the color determination table TBL-HC as a color determination table for determining the display color. (Step S526), the process proceeds to step S532.

  When the EXT data in the variable category command does not indicate super reach (losing) (step S525; NO), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the EXT data in the variable category command indicates normal reach (big hit). (Step S527). When the EXT data in the variation category command indicates normal reach (big hit) (step S527; YES), the effect control CPU 101 sets the color determination table TBL-AA as a color determination table for determining the display color. (Step S528), the process proceeds to step S532.

  When the EXT data in the variable category command does not indicate normal reach (big hit) (step S527; NO), the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not the EXT data in the variable category command indicates normal reach (big hit, with pseudo-ream). Is determined (step S529). When the EXT data in the variation category command indicates normal reach (big hit, with pseudo-ream) (step S529; YES), the production control CPU 101 determines the color for determining the display color in the color determination table TBL-AB. Set as a table (step S530), and proceed to step S532.

  When the EXT data in the variable category command does not indicate normal reach (big hit, pseudo-ream) (step S529; NO), the EXT data in the variable category command is super-reach (big hit) or super-reach (big hit, pseudo-ream) Therefore, the effect control CPU 101 sets the color determination table TBL-AC as a color determination table for determining the display color (step S531), and proceeds to step S532.

  When the color determination table is set according to each variation pattern type in this way, the effect control CPU 101 determines using a random number value (not shown) for determining the winning display color and the active display color (step S532). . Then, the effect control CPU 101 stores the determined winning display color and active display color in the start winning change mode buffer (step S533), and ends the winning / active display color determination process.

  The winning / active display color determination process described above is a process performed in common in Step S904 (Special Figure 1) and Step S908 (Special Figure 2) in the winning effect determination process. The special color determination table set in the winning / active display color determination process is the same color determination table, but different color determination tables are set in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. It may be. In this case, for example, the color determination table set in the case of FIG. 2 may be a color determination table in which a color change is easily performed as compared with the color determination table set in the case of FIG. Note that “color change is easily performed” means that, for example, the difference between the display color value at the time of winning and the display color value at the time of active is large. In general, the reserved digest of the special figure 2 is performed earlier than the reserved digest of the special figure 1, so that the player can improve the tempo one after another by using a color determination table in which color changes are easily performed. Since the color change (that is, the change in the degree of expectation) can be enjoyed, the interest can be improved.

  Further, the player may be able to set the color determination table to be set. Specifically, for example, the player can set any one of the three aspects of “no color change”, “difficult to change color”, and “easy to change color”. In this way, by making it possible for the player to make settings, it is possible to adapt to various preferences that vary depending on the player's generation and preferences, so that the interest of many players can be improved. “No color change” means that the display color at the time of winning and the display color at the time of active are the same display color. As one of the settings for “no color change”, a setting for setting the display color to only white (that is, a normal display color) may be provided. Also, “difficult to change color” means, for example, that the difference between the display color value at the time of winning and the display color value at the time of active is small.

  FIG. 55 and FIG. 56 are diagrams showing an example of determination ratios based on the color determination table used in the winning / active display color determination processing of FIG.

  The determination ratios based on the color determination tables shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 indicate the determination ratios for determining the combination of the winning display color and the active display color. The color determination table is stored in the ROM 121. The color determination table shown in FIG. 55 is a color determination table used at the time of loss, and the color determination table shown in FIG. 56 is a color determination table used at the time of big hit.

  FIG. 55A is a diagram showing a determination ratio based on the color determination table TBL-HA. TBL-HA is a color determination table that is set when the variation category command indicates a variation pattern type including non-reach (no pseudo-continuous) and non-reach (with pseudo-continuous).

  In the color determination table TBL-HA, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is white is 70%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is blue is 5%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is yellow is 4%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is green is 3%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is red is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is rainbow is 0%.

  In the color determination table TBL-HA, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is blue is 4%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is yellow is 3%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is green is 2%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is red is 1%. The determination rate that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is rainbow is 0%.

  In the color determination table TBL-HA, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is yellow is 2%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is green is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is red is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is rainbow is 0%.

  In the color determination table TBL-HA, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is green and the display color when active is green is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is green and the display color when active is red is 1%. The determination rate that the display color when winning is green and the display color when active is rainbow is 0%.

  In the color determination table TBL-HA, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is red and the display color when active is red is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is red and the display color when active is rainbow is 0%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is rainbow and the display color when active is rainbow is 0%.

  FIG. 55B is a diagram showing a determination ratio based on the color determination table TBL-HB. TBL-HB is a color determination table that is set when the variation category command indicates a variation pattern type including normal reach (without pseudo-continuous) and normal reach (with pseudo-continuous).

  In the color determination table TBL-HB, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is white is 30%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is blue is 15%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is yellow is 10%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is green is 6%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is red is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is rainbow is 0%.

  In the color determination table TBL-HB, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is blue is 10%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is yellow is 7%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is green is 4%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is red is 1%. The determination rate that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is rainbow is 0%.

  In the color determination table TBL-HB, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is yellow is 5%. The determination rate that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is green is 3%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is red is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is rainbow is 0%.

  In the color determination table TBL-HB, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is green and the display color when active is green is 2%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is green and the display color when active is red is 1%. The determination rate that the display color when winning is green and the display color when active is rainbow is 0%.

  In the color determination table TBL-HB, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is red and the display color when active is red is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is red and the display color when active is rainbow is 0%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is rainbow and the display color when active is rainbow is 0%.

  FIG. 55C is a diagram showing a determination ratio based on the color determination table TBL-HC. TBL-HC is a color determination table that is set when the variation category command indicates a variation pattern type including super reach (without pseudo-continuous) and super reach (with pseudo-continuous).

  In the color determination table TBL-HC, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is white is 2%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is blue is 3%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is yellow is 9%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is green is 9%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is red is 10%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is rainbow is 0%.

  In the color determination table TBL-HC, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is blue is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is yellow is 8%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is green is 8%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is red is 9%. The determination rate that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is rainbow is 0%.

  In the color determination table TBL-HC, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is yellow is 7%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is green is 7%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is red is 8%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is rainbow is 0%.

  In the color determination table TBL-HC, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is green and the display color when active is green is 6%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is green and the display color when active is red is 7%. The determination rate that the display color when winning is green and the display color when active is rainbow is 0%.

  In the color determination table TBL-HC, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is red and the display color when active is red is 6%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is red and the display color when active is rainbow is 0%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is rainbow and the display color when active is rainbow is 0%.

  In this way, in the case of a loss, the display color does not become a rainbow both when winning and when active. Moreover, although it displays with the display color with low expectation as a whole, according to the reach aspect, it displays with the display color with high expectation, and the interest is improved.

  FIG. 56A is a diagram showing a determination ratio based on the color determination table TBL-AA. TBL-AA is a color determination table that is set when the variation category command indicates a variation pattern type including normal reach (big hit).

  In the color determination table TBL-AA, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is white is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is blue is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is yellow is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is green is 2%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is red is 5%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is rainbow is 4%.

  In the color determination table TBL-AA, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is blue is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is yellow is 2%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is green is 4%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is red is 6%. The determination rate that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is rainbow is 5%.

  In the color determination table TBL-AA, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is yellow is 3%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is green is 5%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is red is 7%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is rainbow is 6%.

  In the color determination table TBL-AA, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is green and the display color when active is green is 7%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is green and the display color when active is red is 8%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is green and the display color when active is rainbow is 7%.

  In the color determination table TBL-AA, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is red and the display color when active is red is 8%. The determination rate that the display color when winning is red and the display color when active is rainbow is 8%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is rainbow and the display color when active is rainbow is 9%.

  Note that the color determination table TBL-AA is a color determination table that is set in the case of a big hit in normal reach, but in order to increase the unexpectedness, the color determination table TBL-AA is replaced with the color determination table TBL-AA in FIG. The color determination table TBL-HA may be set. In general, when a player enjoys a performance with an expectation according to the display color, a big hit (and normal reach) with a display color that cannot be expected almost has a great impact on the player. By showing the player that there is a possibility of a big hit even with such a low-expected performance, it is possible to maintain the player's interest even with a low-expected performance.

  FIG. 56B is a diagram showing a determination ratio based on the color determination table TBL-AB. TBL-AB is a color determination table that is set when the variation category command indicates a variation pattern type including normal reach (a big hit, with pseudo-ream).

  In the color determination table TBL-AB, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is white is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is blue is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is yellow is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is green is 3%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is red is 4%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is rainbow is 5%.

  In the color determination table TBL-HA, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is blue is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is yellow is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is green is 4%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is red is 5%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is rainbow is 6%.

  In the color determination table TBL-HA, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is yellow is 2%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is green is 5%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is red is 6%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is rainbow is 7%.

  In the color determination table TBL-HA, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is green and the display color when active is green is 6%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is green and the display color when active is red is 7%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is green and the display color when active is rainbow is 8%.

  In the color determination table TBL-HA, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is red and the display color when active is red is 8%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is red and the display color when active is rainbow is 9%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is rainbow and the display color when active is rainbow is 10%.

  FIG. 56C is a diagram showing a determination ratio based on the color determination table TBL-AC. TBL-AC is a color determination table that is set when the variation category command indicates a variation pattern type including super reach (big hit) and super reach (big hit, with pseudo-ream).

  In the color determination table TBL-AC, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is white is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is blue is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is yellow is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is green is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is red is 3%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is white and the display color when active is rainbow is 4%.

  In the color determination table TBL-AC, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is blue is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is yellow is 1%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is green is 2%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is red is 6%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is blue and the display color when active is rainbow is 7%.

  In the color determination table TBL-AC, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is yellow is 1%. The determination rate that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is green is 3%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is red is 7%. The determination rate that the display color when winning is yellow and the display color when active is rainbow is 8%.

  In the color determination table TBL-HC, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is green and the display color when active is green is 4%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is green and the display color when active is red is 8%. The determination rate that the display color when winning is green and the display color when active is rainbow is 9%.

  In the color determination table TBL-HC, the determination ratio that the display color when winning is red and the display color when active is red is 9%. The determination ratio that the display color when winning is red and the display color when active is rainbow is 11%. And the determination ratio that the display color at the time of winning is rainbow and the display color at the time of active is rainbow is 12%.

  Thus, in the case of a big hit, the display color at the time of winning or active may be a rainbow. Moreover, although it displays with the display color with high expectation as a whole, according to the reach aspect, it displays with the display color with higher expectation, and the interest is improved.

  In each of the color determination tables described above, the display colors at the time of winning and the display colors at the time of active are determined at the ratios shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, respectively. It is only necessary to assign a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value for determining the display color.

  In addition to each color determination table described above, for example, a color determination table for determining reach when the winning display color is green, or a color determination table for determining super reach when the winning display color is red. May be used. In this way, by associating the display color with another effect mode (for example, an effect effect) such as a reach effect, it is possible to improve the interest until the suspension is shifted to the active display area.

  Next, an outline of the change mode determination method will be described prior to the description of the change mode determination process executed in steps S905 and 909 of FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining a method for determining a change mode when winning is awarded in each pattern of 0 to 3 in the second embodiment. In FIG. 57, special figure 1 is taken as an example, but the same applies to special figure 2. In the present embodiment, the display color when the hold is shifted is determined with reference to a level-up table (lottery data) described later. Note that “OK” shown in FIG. 57 indicates that the display color has already been determined.

  First, the case of winning with 0 on-hold will be described with reference to FIG. In the case of winning with 0 on-hold, since the display color has already been determined by the display color determination process at the time of winning / active, it is not necessary to determine the change aspect by the change aspect determination process. In the present embodiment, when a winning is made with 0 on-hold, the display is first performed with the display color at the time of winning in the holding 1 and then shifted to the active display area AHA and displayed with the display color when active. Therefore, for example, when the display color at the time of winning is blue and the display color at the time of active is green, it is displayed in green in the active display area AHA after being temporarily displayed in blue in the maintenance 1.

  The case of winning with one hold will be described with reference to FIG. In case of winning with one hold, the display color in the reserve 2 is determined as the display color at the time of winning by the display color determining process at the time of winning / active, and the display color in the active display area AHA is when active Since the display color is determined, it is necessary to determine the display color in the protection 1. Therefore, as indicated by the arrows, the display color at all the holding positions is determined by referring to the level-up table once in order to change the display color at the hold 1 from the display color at the hold 2.

  A case where two winnings are won will be described with reference to FIG. When winning with two holds, the display color in the hold 3 is determined as the display color at the time of winning by the display color determination process at the time of winning / active, and the display color in the active display area AHA is set to the active color Since it is determined as the display color, it is necessary to determine the display color in the protection 2 and the protection 1. Therefore, as shown by the arrow, in order to change the display color in the hold 2 from the display color in the hold 3, the level-up table is referred to, and then the display color in the hold 1 is changed from the display color in the hold 2 In order to change, the display color at all the holding positions is determined by referring to the level-up table again (two times in total).

  A case where a prize is won with three pieces on hold will be described with reference to FIG. When winning with 3 holds, the display color at the hold 4 is determined as the display color at the time of winning by the display color determining process at the time of winning / active, and the display color in the active display area AHA is set to the active color Since it is determined as the display color, it is necessary to determine the display color in the protection 3, the maintenance 2, and the maintenance 1. Therefore, as shown by the arrow, in order to change the display color in the storage 3 from the display color in the storage 4, the display color in the storage 2 is changed from the display color in the storage 3 by referring to the level-up table. All the hold positions by referring to the level-up table, and then referring again to the level-up table to change the display color in the hold 1 from the display color in the hold 2 (total 3 times). The display color at is determined.

  As described above, the number of times the level-up table is referred to differs depending on the number of reserved storages that are subject to change mode determination. Specifically, in the case of the fourth reserved memory, the number of times of referring to the level-up table is three times, and in the case of the third reserved memory, the number of times of referring to the level-up table is two. In the case of the first reserved storage, the number of times of referring to the level-up table is one time, and in the case of the first reserved memory, the number of times of referring to the level-up table is zero.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 57, when the display color in the storage 1 is determined by referring to the level-up table in the storage 2, the display colors in all the storage positions are determined.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the change mode determination process executed in steps S905 and 909 of FIG. The effect control CPU 101 substitutes the value of the winning display color determined in the winning / active display color determination process for x and the value of the active display color for y (step S541).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 substitutes a value obtained by subtracting x from y in d in order to obtain a level difference (step difference) (step S542). Next, the winning position at the time of winning is substituted for s (step S543). For example, when three holds are displayed at the time of winning a prize and the holding position at the time of winning a prize is 4, “4” is substituted.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not s = 1 (step S544). If s = 1 (step S544; YES), the change mode determination process ends. This is because, if s = 1, as shown in FIG. 57A, the display color has already been determined in the winning / active display color determination process.

  When s = 1 is not satisfied (step S544; NO), the effect control CPU 101 substitutes s-1 for the loop counter k (step S545). The loop counter k corresponds to the holding position k, and the display color is determined from the winning display color to the active display color by decreasing k. Next, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a big hit (step S546). Whether it is a big hit can be determined from the EXT data of the variable category command. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S546; YES), the effect control CPU 101 sets the level-up table (big hit) as a table for determining the change mode (step S547), and proceeds to step S549.

  When it is determined to be lost (step S546; NO), the effect control CPU 101 sets the level-up table (loss) as a table for determining the change mode (step S548), and proceeds to step S549. Different level-up tables are provided for big hits and loses, but all of them are based on a level difference d, a loop counter k (holding position k), and a random value (not shown) for determining the number of ups. It is a table for determining the number U.

  The effect control CPU 101 determines the up number U from the level difference d, the loop counter k (holding position k), and the random number value using the set level up table (step S549), and the up number based on the determination result. U is determined (step S550). The up number U is an up number from the display color at the hold position k + 1 to the display color at the hold position k after the shift.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 substitutes x + U for x, and substitutes y−x for the level difference d (step S551). x to which x + U is substituted indicates the value of the display color at the holding position k, and is held in a change mode buffer provided in the RAM. The level difference d to which y−x is substituted indicates the level difference between the display color at the holding position k and the display color when active.

  The effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from k (step S552). Thereby, the hold position after the shift is set to k. Further, since k is decreased, it can be seen that the display color is determined from the winning time to the active time.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not k = 0 (step S553). If k = 0 is not satisfied (step S553; NO), the process returns to step S549. If k = 0 (step S553; YES), the change mode determination process ends. As described above, since the loop counter k is a counter for determining the display color at the hold position k, the fact that k is 0 indicates the display color at the hold position 0, that is, the active display area AHA. However, since the display color when active is already determined, the processing is terminated. If d = 0 (that is, the level difference is 0) in step S551, the display color values at all holding positions k for which display colors have not been determined are set to x, and steps S550 to S550 are performed. The process of step S553 may be omitted.

  As described above, in the change mode determination process of FIG. 58, the lottery data is referred to based on the winning display color and the active display color determined by the winning / active display color determining process, and the first timing is determined. After determining the change, the change at the second timing is determined with reference to the lottery data.

  Here, the first timing and the second timing are timings when the hold shifts, and the first and second timings are determined in the order in which the display colors are determined. In the case of FIG. 58, since the display color is determined from the winning display color to the active display color, the first timing is the timing that comes before the second timing as the order in which the suspension is completed.

  In the change mode determination process shown in FIG. 58, the change mode of the effect mode can be determined according to whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, when the condition “whether or not a big hit” is satisfied as a predetermined condition, a level up table (big hit) is set, and when the above condition is not satisfied, a level up table ( Since the “losing” is set, it is possible to determine the change mode of the production mode according to whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, as shown in step S549, the up number is determined from the level difference, the holding position, and the random number value. Therefore, compared to the case where only the level difference is used or the case where only the holding position is used, the variation is more varied. A rich production can be performed.

  Next, the level-up table will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. The determination ratios based on the level-up tables shown in FIGS. 59 and 60 indicate the determination ratios for determining the up number from the level difference, the hold position, and the random number value. This level-up table is stored in the ROM 121. The level-up table shown in FIG. 59 is a level-up table used at the time of big hit, and the level-up table shown in FIG. 60 is a level-up table used at the time of loss.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, the level-up table includes a level difference, a holding position, and an up number. The level difference is a level difference from the active display color. In this embodiment, since there are six display colors from white to rainbow, the level difference is 5 at the maximum, and the level difference is 0 at the minimum. Further, since the holding position is an up number for determining the display color at the holding position, for example, in the case of the holding position 3, the up number from the holding position 4 (4 → 3) is indicated. .

  In the level-up table (big hit), when the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the number of ups is 0 is 2%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 4%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 2 is 7%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the number of ups is 3 is 13%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 4 is 25%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 5 is 49%.

  In addition, when the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 16%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 16%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 2 is 17%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 3 is 17%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 4 is 17%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 5 is 17%.

  Further, when the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the number of ups is 0 is 45%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 25%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 2 is 13%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 3 is 7%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 4 is 4%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 5 is 2%.

  In addition, when the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 2%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 5%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 2 is 12%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 3 is 25%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 4 is 56%.

  Further, when the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 20%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 20%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 2 is 20%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 3 is 20%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 4 is 20%.

  In addition, when the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 56%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 25%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 2 is 12%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 3 is 5%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 4 is 2%.

  In addition, when the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 3%. When the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 8%. When the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 2 is 23%. When the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 3 is 66%.

  In addition, when the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 25%. When the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 25%. When the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 2 is 25%. When the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 3 is 25%.

  In addition, when the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 66%. When the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 23%. When the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 2 is 8%. When the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 3 is 3%.

  In addition, when the level difference is 2 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 4%. When the level difference is 2 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 18%. When the level difference is 2 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 2 is 78%.

  In addition, when the level difference is 2 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 33%. When the level difference is 2 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 33%. When the level difference is 2 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 2 is 34%.

  Further, when the level difference is 2 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 78%. When the level difference is 2 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 18%. When the level difference is 2 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 2 is 4%.

  Further, when the level difference is 1 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 10%. When the level difference is 1 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 90%. In addition, when the level difference is 1 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 50%. When the level difference is 1 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 50%. Further, when the level difference is 1 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 90%. When the level difference is 1 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 10%.

  Further, when the level difference is 0, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 100% at any holding position. In the description of FIG. 58, it has been described that when the level difference becomes 0, the processing of step S550 to step S553 may be omitted, but in this case, the “level” in the level-up table (big hit) Since the table with “difference” of “0” is not necessary, the compression of the capacity can be further reduced.

  Thus, in the determination ratio based on the level-up table (big hit), the ratio at which a large up number is determined increases as the holding position approaches the active display area AHA. That is, the closer the holding position is to the active display area AHA, the greater the number of levels and the bigger the hit. In this way, since the player's expectation is drastically increased immediately before the change of the decorative pattern due to the hold, and it becomes a big hit, the display color change effect according to this embodiment is an effect that has a large impact on the player. It has become.

  Next, with regard to the level-up table (losing), in the level-up table (losing), when the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the number of ups is 0 is 49%. . When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 25%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 2 is 13%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the number of ups is 3 is 7%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the number of ups is 4 is 4%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the number of ups is 5 is 2%.

  In addition, when the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 17%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 17%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 2 is 17%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 3 is 17%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 4 is 16%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 5 is 16%.

  In addition, when the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 2%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 4%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 3, the determination rate that the number of ups is 2 is 7%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 3 is 13%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 4 is 25%. When the level difference is 5 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 5 is 45%.

  Further, when the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 56%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 25%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 2 is 12%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 3 is 5%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 4 is 2%.

  Further, when the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 20%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 20%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 2 is 20%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 3 is 20%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 4 is 20%.

  Further, when the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 2%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 5%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 2 is 12%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 3 is 25%. When the level difference is 4 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 4 is 56%.

  Further, when the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 66%. When the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 23%. When the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 2 is 8%. When the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 3 is 3%.

  In addition, when the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 25%. When the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 25%. When the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 2 is 25%. When the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 3 is 25%.

  Further, when the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 3%. When the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 8%. When the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 2 is 23%. When the level difference is 3 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 3 is 66%.

  In addition, when the level difference is 2 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 78%. When the level difference is 2 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 18%. When the level difference is 2 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 2 is 4%.

  Further, when the level difference is 2 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 34%. When the level difference is 2 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 33%. When the level difference is 2 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 2 is 33%.

  In addition, when the level difference is 2 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 4%. When the level difference is 2 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 18%. When the level difference is 2 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 2 is 78%.

  In addition, when the level difference is 1 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 90%. When the level difference is 1 and the holding position is 1, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 10%. In addition, when the level difference is 1 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 50%. When the level difference is 1 and the holding position is 2, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 50%. In addition, when the level difference is 1 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 10%. When the level difference is 1 and the holding position is 3, the determination ratio at which the up number is 1 is 90%.

  Further, when the level difference is 0, the determination ratio at which the up number is 0 is 100% at any holding position. In the description of FIG. 58, it has been described that when the level difference becomes 0, the processing of step S550 to step S553 may be omitted, but in this case, the “level” in the level-up table (losing) Since the table with “difference” of “0” is not necessary, the compression of the capacity can be further reduced.

  As described above, in the determination ratio based on the level-up table (losing), the ratio at which a larger up number is determined increases as the position is closer to the holding position at the time of winning. That is, the number of levels increases immediately after winning a prize. In this way, by increasing the player's expectation level early, it is possible to increase the player's interest, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  As shown in the determination ratios based on the level-up table (big hit) and level-up table (losing) described above, even if the difference in the number of levels (level difference) between the winning display color and the active display color is the same, Depending on the number, the change mode of the production mode varies. This is because the level-up table is provided with 1 to 3 holding positions for each level difference, and the number of ups at each of the holding positions 1 to 3 is different.

  In each of the above-described level-up tables, the number of ups is compared with a random value for determining the number of ups in each of the level difference and the holding position, as determined in the ratios of FIGS. A numerical value (judgment value) may be assigned.

  The effect control CPU 101 selects a predetermined effect (for example, display color change effect) determined in the winning effect determination process and a process table corresponding to the change mode, and effects symbol variation start process (step S801) to effect By executing the symbol variation stop process (step S803), a predetermined effect (for example, a display color change effect or the like) is executed.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, it is possible to determine an effect mode of a predetermined effect (in this example, a display color change effect, etc.), execute the predetermined effect, and at least the first timing (this example). Then, the effect mode is changed at a plurality of change timings including a timing at which the hold shifts and the second timing (in this example, a timing at which the hold shifts and a timing different from the first timing, etc.). Can be determined. In addition, after determining the effect mode and the final effect mode when starting the predetermined effect (in this example, determination by the display color determination process at the time of winning / active in FIG. 54), the determined start time is determined. Based on the production mode and the final production mode, a change mode of the production mode is determined (in this example, determination by a change mode determination process or the like in FIG. 58). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the compression of the data capacity.

Embodiment 3 FIG.
The gaming machine shown in the first embodiment further includes a first reserved memory display unit that displays the first reserved memory number, and a second reserved memory number display unit that displays the second reserved memory number, When controlled to the first state (for example, the low base state), the first hold display is displayed, while the second hold display is not displayed, and the second state (for example, the high base state) is controlled. In some cases, the second hold display may be displayed while the first hold display is not displayed. Hereinafter, when the first state (for example, the low base state) is controlled, the first hold display is displayed, while the second hold display is not displayed, and the second state (for example, the high base state) is controlled. In the third embodiment, the second hold display is displayed while the first hold display is not displayed.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of portions that perform the same configuration and processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and portions that are different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it replaces with the total reserved memory display part 18c, and the 1st reserved memory display part 9a which displays the 1st reserved memory number, and the 2nd reserved memory display part 9b which displays the 2nd reserved memory number With.

  Further, in this embodiment, in addition to the configuration shown in the first embodiment, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number can be recognized on the lower left side of the display screen of the effect display device 9. A fourth hold display section 9e for displaying is provided. On the fourth hold display portion 9e, two numerical values are displayed at the top and bottom, the upper numerical value corresponds to the first reserved memory number, and the lower numerical value corresponds to the second reserved memory number. In this embodiment, either the first on-hold display or the second on-hold display is not displayed depending on the gaming state, but by confirming the display on the fourth on-hold display unit 9e, it is possible to determine which gaming state is in effect. However, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number can be confirmed.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing (step S704) according to the third embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes in steps S611 to S634 and S635 in the command analysis process are the same as those described in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, if N is determined in step S632, the process proceeds to step S634A shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, in the command analysis process, if the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S634A), the effect control CPU 101 displays the background screen in the effect display device 9 according to the normal state. The screen is changed to a screen (for example, a background screen with a blue background color) (step S634B). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability / low base state), the effect mode (hereinafter, referred to as the normal state) is displayed by displaying the background screen corresponding to the normal state. (Also referred to as a normal performance mode). Next, the production control CPU 101 performs control to hide the second hold display of the second hold storage display unit 9b and display the first hold display of the first hold storage display unit 9a (step S634C). In addition, if set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the time-short state flag indicating that the time-short state is set (step S634D).

  If the received effect control command is a time reduction state background designation command (step S634E), the effect control CPU 101 uses the background screen in the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the time reduction state (for example, a green diagonal line is drawn). Background screen) (step S634F). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the short time state (low probability / high base state), the effect mode (hereinafter, referred to as the short time state) is displayed by displaying the background screen according to the short time state. (Also referred to as a time reduction effect mode). Next, the production control CPU 101 performs control to hide the first hold display of the first hold storage display unit 9a and display the second hold display of the second hold storage display unit 9b (step S634G). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 sets a time reduction state flag (step S634H). In addition, if it is set, the production control CPU 101 resets the probability variation state flag indicating the probability variation state (step S634I).

  If the received effect control command is a probability change state background designation command (step S634J), the effect control CPU 101 uses the background screen in the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the probability change state (for example, a red diagonal line is drawn). Background screen) (step S634K). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability / high base state), an effect mode (hereinafter, referred to as the probability variation state) is displayed by displaying a background screen corresponding to the probability variation state. (Also referred to as a probability variation effect mode). Next, the production control CPU 101 performs control to hide the first hold display of the first hold storage display unit 9a and display the second hold display of the second hold storage display unit 9b (step S634L). Further, the production control CPU 101 sets a probability variation state flag (step S634M).

  If the received effect control command is not a probability change state background designation command, the process proceeds to step S635.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is in the low base state (normal state), the number of winnings in the second start winning opening 14 is extremely small compared to the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening 13. Therefore, in the low base state (normal state), the first reserved memory number based on winning in the first start winning port 13 is more than the second reserved memory number based on winning in the second starting winning port 14. Therefore, the information has high priority. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the low base state (normal state), the second hold display based on the winning at the second start winning port 14 is not displayed, and the second based on the winning at the first starting winning port 13 is not displayed. Control is performed so that only one hold display is displayed (see FIG. 62A). On the other hand, when the gaming state is the high base state (time-short state or probability variation state), the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening 13 is extremely small compared to the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening 14. Therefore, in the high base state (short-time state or probability change state), the second reserved memory number based on the winning at the second starting winning port 14 is the first reserved memory based on the winning at the first starting winning port 13. The information has higher priority than the number. Therefore, in the high base state (short-time state or probability change state), the first hold display based on the winning at the first start winning opening 13 is not displayed, but the second hold display based on the winning at the second starting winning opening 14 is displayed. Only the display is controlled (see FIG. 62B). By controlling in this way, it is possible to easily recognize information having a high priority according to the gaming state.

  Next, specific examples of the hold display and the active display according to the gaming state will be described. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the hold display and the active display according to the gaming state.

  FIG. 62A shows a specific example of the hold display and the active display when the gaming state is the low base state (normal state), the first hold memory number is 3, and the second hold memory number is 1. It is explanatory drawing. FIG. 62B shows a hold display and an active display when the gaming state is a high base state (short-time state or probability change state), the first hold memory number is 1, and the second hold memory number is 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example.

  As shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B, in this embodiment, in the low base state (normal state), the second hold display on the second hold storage display portion 9b is not displayed, and the first hold is made. Control is performed so as to display only the first hold display of the memory display unit 9a (see FIG. 62A). On the other hand, when the gaming state is the high base state (short time state or probability change state), the first hold display of the first hold storage display unit 9a is not displayed, and only the second hold display of the second hold storage display unit 9b is displayed. Control is performed (see FIG. 62B).

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B, in this embodiment, the first hold display is displayed in a form in which a triangle is included in a circular shape (the first hold display in FIG. 62A). The storage display unit 9a) and the second hold display are displayed in a form in which a quadrangle is included inside the circle (second hold storage display unit 9b in FIG. 62B). Strictly speaking, FIG. 62A shows the normal first hold display, and FIG. 62B shows the normal second hold display.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B, in this embodiment, in the low base state (normal state), the first hold display displayed in the low base state (normal state) The active display is displayed in the same manner (active display area 9A in FIG. 62A), and is displayed in the high base state (time-short state or probability variation state) in the high base state (time-short state or probability variation state). The active display is displayed in the same manner as the second hold display (active display area 9A in FIG. 62B). In the example shown in FIG. 62, the active display is displayed in the same manner as the first hold display or the second hold display, but the active display is partially shared with the first hold display or the second hold display. May be displayed. For example, the active display is displayed in a mode in which the shape or part of the pattern is the same as the first hold display or the second hold display, and the color or size is different, or the shape or color is different from the first hold display or the second hold display The active display may be displayed in the same manner but with different operations.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B, in this embodiment, in the low base state (normal state), a single color background screen is displayed (FIG. 62A), and the high base is displayed. In the state (short-time state or probability change state), a background screen with a green diagonal line is displayed (FIG. 62B).

  As shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B, in this embodiment, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are displayed in a recognizable manner regardless of the gaming state (FIG. 62). (A), (B) fourth hold display section 9e). In the fourth hold display section 9e, two numerical values are displayed at the top and bottom, the upper numerical value corresponds to the first reserved stored number, and the lower numerical value corresponds to the second reserved stored number.

  Next, specific examples of the hold display and the active display in the low base state will be described. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the hold display and the active display in the low base state.

  In FIG. 63A, the gaming state is the low base state (normal state), the first reserved memory number is 3, the second reserved memory number is 1, the variable display is terminated, and the stop symbol is derived and displayed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state made. In this embodiment, since the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display is then started based on the second reserved storage.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the active display corresponding to the variable display started based on the second hold storage is the same as the first hold display displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a. It is displayed in the active display area 9A. In FIG. 63B, as the active display corresponding to the variable display started based on the second hold storage, the display in the same mode as the second hold display displayed on the second hold storage display unit 9b is active. It may be displayed in the display area 9A.

  As shown in FIG. 63, in this embodiment, an active display is displayed even when a variable display that does not match the gaming state is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 62, in this embodiment, the active display is displayed in a manner corresponding to the gaming state regardless of whether the display is variable based on either the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory. The Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the first hold display can be displayed according to the first hold memory, and the second hold display can be displayed according to the second hold memory. Variable display or second identification information of the display means (in this example, the first reserved storage display unit 9a and the second reserved storage display unit 9b) and the first identification information being executed (in this example, the first special symbol) Variable display corresponding display means (active display area 9A in this example) capable of displaying variable display compatible display (in this example, active display) corresponding to variable display (in this example, the second special symbol); It has. When the hold display means is controlled to the first state (in this example, the low base state (normal state)), the first hold display is displayed, while the second hold display is not displayed. When controlled to a state (in this example, a high base state (time reduction state or probability variation state)), the second hold display is displayed while the first hold display is not displayed (see FIG. 62). ).

  (1) Further, according to this embodiment, the variable display corresponding display means can perform the variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information being executed even when controlled to the first state. Is displayed (see FIG. 63). Such a configuration can prevent the player from being confused. That is, when controlled to the first state, the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage is not displayed, but when the variable display of the second identification information is started based on the second hold storage, the variable display is performed. If the correspondence display is not displayed, the player may be confused. Therefore, even when controlled to the first state, the player can be confused by configuring the variable display corresponding display to correspond to the variable display of the second identification information being executed. Can be prevented.

  (2) Further, according to this embodiment, the first hold display and the second hold display are configured to be displayed in different modes (see FIG. 62). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy to recognize the type of reserved storage and to make it easy to recognize the gaming state.

Embodiment 4 FIG.
The gaming machine shown in the first embodiment further includes a sub display device (sub display device) separately from the effect display device 9 (main display device), and the effect display device 9 and the sub display device are interlocked. You may comprise so that a prefetch notice effect can be performed in the aspect. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a fourth embodiment in which a prefetch notice effect is configured to be executable in a manner in which the effect display device 9 and the sub display device are linked.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of portions that perform the same configuration and processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and portions that are different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the configuration shown in the first embodiment, a liquid crystal display device having a size smaller than the liquid crystal display device (LCD) constituting the effect display device 9 is provided below the effect display device 9. A sub display device 9S composed of (LCD) is provided. Further, in the first embodiment, the combined hold storage display unit 18c and the active display area 9A are provided on the display screen of the effect display device 9, but in this embodiment, the display screen of the sub display device 9S is provided. A total pending storage display portion 18c and an active display area 9A are provided.

  In this embodiment, two liquid crystal display devices, that is, an effect display device 9 and a sub display device 9S, are provided. However, the effect display device 9 is also called a main display device, and the sub display device 9S is a sub display. Also called a device. Further, in this embodiment, the main display device refers to a liquid crystal display device used for performing various main effect displays such as a change display of effect symbols. The display executed by the main display device and the sub display device is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a part of the notice effect or the big hit display is displayed on the sub display device. You may comprise. As such, it is sufficient that the main display device performs at least a main effect such as a change display of the effect symbols and displays the hold display and the active display on the sub display device. The sub display device 9 (sub display device) may be configured to perform variable display.

  In this embodiment, a pending change notice effect, which is a kind of prefetch notice effect, is executed. In this embodiment, when the hold change notice effect is executed, the display of the hold display is started in the normal mode at the timing when the start winning is generated, and then the action effect (the action effect A to be described later) is started at the timing of the hold display shift. Or the action effect B) is executed, and the effect that the hold display to be notified changes to any special display mode is executed (therefore, in this embodiment, at least the action effect is included in the hold change notice effect) Both the part to be executed and the part to change the hold display for the notice target). If the display mode of the hold display is changed after the hold change notice effect is executed, the hold storage of the notice target is digested at the timing when the variable display of the notice target is subsequently started, and the special display mode of the notice target is displayed. While the hold display is erased, the special display mode active display is displayed in the active display area 9A. Then, when the change display of the notice target is finished, the active display of the special display mode is deleted. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the hold change notice effect is executed, the display of the special display mode (hold display, active display) is continued until the change display of the notice target is finished.

  In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) executes a hold change notice effect determining process for determining a hold change notice effect in the effect control process.

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of a hold change notice effect determining table used for determining a hold change notice effect in the hold change notice effect determining process. As shown in FIG. 64, in this embodiment, determination values are assigned to the no-hold change notice effect and the hold change notice effects 1 to 6, respectively, in the hold change notice effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 64, in this embodiment, there are six types of hold change notice effects 1 to 6 as hold change notice effects.

  The hold change notice effect 1 does not change the display mode of the hold display in the normal form (in this example, a white round display) only by executing the action effect A at the timing of the hold display shift. It is. In addition, the hold change notice effect 2 simply performs the action effect B at the timing of the hold display shift, and does not change the hold display display mode in the normal mode (in this example, the white round display). This is a notice effect. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the hold change notice effect 1 or the hold change notice effect 2 is executed, only the action effect (action effect A or action effect B) is executed, and the display mode of the hold display is Since it does not change, it corresponds to the so-called Gase hold change notice effect.

  The hold change notice effect 3 is a hold change notice effect that executes the action effect A at the timing of the hold display shift and changes the display mode of the hold display to a blue round display. The hold change notice effect 4 is a hold change notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display to a blue round display while executing the action effect B at the timing of the hold display shift. The hold change notice effect 5 is a hold change notice effect that executes the action effect A at the timing of the hold display shift and changes the display mode of the hold display to a red round display. The hold change notice effect 6 is a hold change notice effect that executes the action effect B at the timing of the hold display shift and changes the display mode of the hold display to a red round display.

  As shown in FIG. 64, in this embodiment, there are two types of action effects A and action effects B as action effects executed in the pending change notice effect. The action effect A is an action effect performed using only the sub display device 9S (sub display device). The action effect B is an action effect performed using the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub display device 9S (sub display device). In addition, when performing the effect, it is not performed using only the liquid crystal display device. For example, a predetermined change sound is output from the speaker at the timing when the hold display or the active display is changed, or a lamp or LED is emitted. For example, it may be accompanied by an effect by another effect device.

  As shown in FIG. 64, in this embodiment, when the determination result indicated by the fluctuation category command is non-reach (fluctuation category 1 indicating that it is a determination result with the fluctuation pattern type of non-reach CA2-1). When the designated command is received), or when the super reach is out of place (when the variation category 8 designation command indicating that it is a determination result with the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is received), it is indicated by the variation category command. When the determination result is a super reach jackpot (when a variation category 23 designation command or a variation category 26 command indicating that it is a determination result with the variation pattern type of Super CA3-3 is received), execution of a pending change notice effect May be determined.

  In this embodiment, the hold change notice effect is an effect that can change the display mode of the hold display using the sub display device 9S (in this example, the hold change notice effect 1 with the action effect A, the hold change notice effect 3). , And hold change notice effect 5. Hereinafter, the first hold change notice effect) and an effect in which the display mode of the hold display can be changed by the manner in which the effect display device 9 and the sub display device 9S are linked (this example). Now, it is roughly divided into a hold change notice effect 2 with action effect B, a hold change notice effect 4, and a hold change notice effect 6. Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a second hold change notice effect. As shown, in the case of a super reach big hit, the ratio at which the second hold change notice effect is executed is relatively higher than the ratio at which the first hold change notice effect is executed. Also, as shown in FIG. 64, when the non-reach shift or the super reach shift occurs, the ratio at which the second hold change notice effect is relatively executed is higher than the ratio at which the first hold change notice effect is executed. It is low. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the second hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed, the first hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed. In comparison, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher.

  Further, in this embodiment, there are a change mode of the display mode of the hold display, in which the hold display to be notified changes to a blue round display and a red round display. As shown in FIG. 64, when the first hold change notice effect is executed, the rate of change to the blue round display is relatively higher than the rate of change to the red round display. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 64, when the second hold change notice effect is executed, the rate of change to the red round display is relatively higher than the rate of change to the blue round display. Yes. Therefore, in this embodiment, depending on whether the first hold change notice effect or the second hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display of the notice target is a blue round shape. The display ratio of the display and the red round display is different.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display does not change even if the hold change notice effect is executed (that is, the hold change notice effect (the hold change notice effect 1 and the hold change notice effect 2) of the gusset is executed). If you want to) Further, as shown in FIG. 64, the ratio at which the first hold change notice effect (the hold change notice effect 1 in this example) is executed is higher than the second hold change notice effect (in this example, It is higher than the rate at which the hold change notice effect 2) is executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the rate at which the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes varies depending on whether the first hold change notice effect or the second hold change notice effect is executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, the second hold change notice effect of Gase (in this example, hold change notice effect 2) is the first hold change notice effect of Gase (in this example, hold change notice effect). Since the execution rate is lower than 1), the rate at which the hold display of the notification target changes is relatively greater when the second hold change notice effect is executed than when the first hold change notice effect is executed. Is expensive. In addition, not only in the aspect shown in this embodiment, conversely, the case where the first hold change notice effect is executed is relatively more noticeable than the case where the second hold change notice effect is executed. You may comprise so that the ratio that a hold display changes may become high.

  Note that the method of allocating the determination of the pending change notice effect is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, when it is configured so that there is a case where it is possible to recognize which hold display in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is the subject of notice before the change of the hold indication, and a case where it cannot be recognized, The execution of the first hold change notice effect or the second hold change notice effect may be determined at different rates depending on whether the hold display can be recognized or not. In this case, for example, a hold display in a display mode (for example, white round display) that is different from the normal mode but different from the final change mode (in this example, blue or red round display) in the hold change notice effect. In addition, when a hold display (so-called white hold display) that suggests that the display mode is to be changed is configured to be displayable, any hold display is notified depending on whether or not the white hold display is displayed. We can infer whether it can be a target. Therefore, the execution of the first hold change notice effect or the second hold change notice effect may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the white hold display is displayed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the case where the display mode of the hold display is changed only once in the hold change notice effect is shown, but the display mode of the hold display may be configured to be changed a plurality of times (further, It may be configured to be able to change multiple times including after the active display.) In this case, in the pending change notice effect determination process, the number of changes, the change pattern at each timing, and the change pattern of each display mode (color, etc.) are determined collectively. May be. Also, for example, in the case of a configuration that can be changed a plurality of times including after the active display, the change pattern including the change after the active display is collectively determined in the pending change notice effect determination process. Alternatively, only the change pattern of the hold display is determined in the hold change notice effect determination process, and the change pattern after the active display is determined is determined by the effect symbol change start process at the start of change. May be.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the action effect is always executed in the hold change notice effect is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the display mode of the hold display changes without performing the action effect. You may comprise so that there may be. In addition, in the case where a hold change notice effect without such an effect is executed, and when the display mode of the hold display (including the active display may be included) as described above can be changed a plurality of times, You may comprise so that the effect presentation may be performed at the timing of the change timing of multiple times, and the number of executions of the effect presentation may be determined.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the effect effect B is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when the effect effect A is executed, or the so-called “gase hold change” Although the case where the degree of advantage is high such as a small proportion of the notice effect is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, conversely, when the effect effect B is executed, the advantage degree may be lower than when the effect effect A is executed.

  Next, a specific example of the production mode of the pending change notice effect will be described. FIG. 65 and FIG. 66 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of the production aspect of the hold change notice effect in the fourth embodiment. Among these, FIG. 65 shows a specific example of the production mode of the first hold change notice effect (hold change notice effect 1, hold change notice effect 3, hold change notice effect 5). FIG. 66 shows a specific example of the production mode of the second hold change notice effect (hold change notice effect 2, hold change notice effect 4, hold change notice effect 6). In FIGS. 65 and 66, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

  First, with reference to FIG. 65, a description will be given of the effect aspect of the first pending change notice effect. In the example shown in FIG. 65 (1), it is assumed that the effect display device 9 (main display device) is executing the variation display of the left middle right effect symbol, and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) is active display. In the area 9A, a predetermined display (active display) is displayed corresponding to the variable display during the current execution, and two hold displays are displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c (that is, two hold memories are displayed). Have accumulated). Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (2), it is assumed that a new start prize is generated, and the number of hold indications is increased by one in the total hold storage display unit 18c to be three. Further, it is assumed that it is determined to execute the first hold change notice effect based on the occurrence of a new start prize (see step S6004). In the example shown in FIG. 65, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the hold change notice effect 3 or the hold change notice effect 5. Then, it is assumed that the variable display is ended as shown in FIG. 65 (3), one reserved memory is consumed, and the next variable display is started as shown in FIG. 65 (4). Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (4), it is assumed that the reserved display is decreased by one in the total reserved storage display unit 18c and becomes two by digesting one reserved memory.

  Next, when the start timing of the action effect A (for example, 1 second after the start of fluctuation) is reached, as shown in FIG. 65 (4), the action effect A is started in the sub display device 9S (sub display device) (step S8107). reference). In this example, as shown in FIG. 65 (4), as the action effect A, the arrow 200 flies toward the active display area 9A and the summed pending storage display unit 18c in the sub display device 9S (sub display device). Various effects are executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (5), the combined hold storage display unit 18c performs an effect in a manner that the arrow 200 hits the hold display to be notified.

  Then, at the end timing of the effect A (for example, 6 seconds after the start of change), as shown in FIG. 65 (6), the effect A is ended in the sub display device 9S (sub display device) (see step S8109). ), The display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed (see step S8111). For example, if the hold change notice effect 3 is executed, the notice target hold display is changed to a blue round display in FIG. 65 (6), and if the hold change notice effect 5 is executed, In 65 (6), the hold display to be notified is changed to a red round display.

  In the example shown in FIG. 65, the case where the hold change notice effect 3 or the hold change notice effect 5 is executed as the first hold change notice effect is shown, but when the hold change notice effect 1 is executed. 65 (4) and (5), only the effect A is executed. In FIG. 65 (6), the hold display changes in the normal mode (in this example, the white round display). It will not (so-called Gase's first pending change notice effect). In this case, for example, an effect such that the arrow flies in the same manner as in FIG. 65 may be performed so that the arrow does not hit due to the hold display being warped.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, an effect mode of the second reserved change notice effect will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 66 (1), it is assumed that the effect display device 9 (main display device) is executing the variable display of the middle left and right effect symbols, and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) performs active display. In the area 9A, a predetermined display (active display) is displayed corresponding to the variable display during the current execution, and two hold displays are displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c (that is, two hold memories are displayed). Have accumulated). Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (2), it is assumed that a new start prize has been generated, and the hold display is increased by one in the total hold storage display unit 18c to be three. Further, it is assumed that it is determined to execute the second hold change notice effect based on the occurrence of a new start prize (see step S6004). In the example shown in FIG. 66, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the hold change notice effect 4 or the hold change notice effect 6. Then, it is assumed that the variable display is ended as shown in FIG. 66 (3), one reserved memory is consumed, and the next variable display is started as shown in FIG. 66 (4). Further, as shown in FIG. 66 (4), it is assumed that the reserved display is decreased by one in the total reserved storage display unit 18c and becomes two by digesting one reserved storage.

  Next, at the start timing of the action effect B (for example, 1 second after the start of fluctuation), as shown in FIG. 66 (4), the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) The used action effect B is started (see step S8113). In this example, as shown in FIG. 66 (4), as the effect effect B, the effect display is directed toward the active display area 9A of the sub display device 9S (sub display device) and the summed hold storage display unit 18c. In the device 9 (main display device), an effect in which the arrow 201 flies is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (5), the arrow 201 travels from the effect display device 9 (men display device) to the sub display device 9S (sub display device), and the sub display device 9S (sub display). In the total hold storage display unit 18c of the device, an effect is performed in such a manner that the arrow 201 hits the hold display to be notified.

  Then, at the end timing of the action effect B (for example, 6 seconds after the start of fluctuation), as shown in FIG. 66 (6), the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) are displayed. The used effect B is terminated (see step S8115), and the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed (see step S8117). For example, if the hold change notice effect 4 is executed, the hold display to be notified in FIG. 66 (6) is changed to a blue round display, and if the hold change notice effect 6 is executed, In 66 (6), the hold display to be notified is changed to a red round display.

  In the example shown in FIG. 66, the case where the hold change notice effect 4 or the hold change notice effect 6 is executed as the second hold change notice effect is shown, but when the hold change notice effect 2 is executed. 66 (4) and (5), only the effect effect B is executed. In FIG. 66 (6), the hold display changes in the normal mode (in this example, the white round display). No (this will be a so-called second-off change notice effect of GASE). In this case, for example, an effect may be executed such that the arrow does not hit due to warping the hold display although the effect is such that the arrow flies in the same manner as in FIG.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the first effect device (in this example, the sub display device 9S (sub display device)) and the second effect device (in this example, the effect display device 9 (main display device) Display device)), and can display the hold display using the first effect device corresponding to the hold storage (in this example, the secondary display device 9S has the combined hold storage display unit 18c), A change effect capable of changing the display mode (in this example, a pending change notice effect) can be executed. In this case, the first change effect that can change the display mode of the hold display using the first effect device (in this example, the first hold change notice effect (the hold change notice effect 1 with the action effect A, the hold change notice effect). 3, hold change notice effect 5)) and the second change effect (in this example, the second hold change notice in this example) that can change the display mode of the hold display in a manner in which the first effect device and the second effect device are linked. Effects (holding change notice effect 2 with action effects B, hold change notice effect 4, hold change notice effect 6)) can be executed. Then, the degree of expectation varies depending on whether the first change effect or the second change effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes (in this example, as shown in FIG. 64, the second hold change notice is made). When an effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes, the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when the first hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes. high). Therefore, the effect of changing effects can be improved by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of changing effects. In addition, since the degree of expectation varies depending on which change effect is executed, the player can be interested in which change effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, the case where the hold change notice effect is configured to be executable is shown. However, in addition to the hold change notice effect or instead of the hold change notice effect, the active display is displayed in the normal mode (in this example). The active display change notice effect that changes to a special display mode (in this example, blue or red round display) different from the white round display may be configured to be executable. In this case, the first active display change notice effect that can change the display mode of the active display using the sub display device 9S in the same manner as in FIG. 65, and the effect display device 9 in the same manner as in FIG. You may comprise so that the 2nd active display change notice effect which can change the display mode of a hold display can be performed by the aspect linked with the sub display apparatus 9S. Then, by performing the same or similar allocation as in FIG. 64, the degree of expectation depends on whether the first active display change notice effect or the second active display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the corresponding display changes. May be different. With this configuration, even when the active display change notice effect is executed, a plurality of types of change effects (in this example, the first active display change notice effect and the second active display change notice effect) can be executed. By doing so, the effect of changing effects can be improved. In addition, since the degree of expectation varies depending on which change effect is executed, the player can be interested in which change effect is executed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the 1st effect device was the sub display device 9S (sub display device) and the 2nd effect device was the effect display device 9 (main display device), the 1st effect device was shown. The device and the second effect device are not limited to such a liquid crystal display device. The first effect device and the second effect device may be realized by a combination of a liquid crystal display device and an effect device other than the liquid crystal display device. For example, the first effect device and the second effect device are operable. You may comprise with a member (acting effect). Further, for example, the liquid crystal display device may be configured to be operable, and the first effect device and the second effect device may be configured by the liquid crystal display device configured to be operable. Furthermore, not only a liquid crystal display device and a movable member (production effect), but also a light emitter such as a lamp or LED, or a sound output device such as a speaker may be used as the effect device.

Embodiment 5. FIG.
In the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment, a change effect (active display change notice effect or hold change notice effect) that can further change the active display or the hold display can be executed, and the change effect is executed. When changing the specific display (active display or hold display), the movable body (operating means such as the stick controller 122 and the push button 120, the movable member for production (production effect)) can be operated. May be. Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment configured to be able to operate the movable body when the change display is executed to change the specific display will be described.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of portions that perform the same configuration and processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and portions that are different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In this embodiment, the first special symbol display unit 8a in the first special symbol display unit 8a and the second special symbol display unit 8b in the first special symbol display unit 8b are arranged in the order of winning in the first start winning unit 13 and the second start winning unit 14. 2 It is assumed that the special symbol variable display is executed. Note that, for example, the configuration shown in this embodiment can be applied to a gaming machine that preferentially executes the change display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the configuration shown in the first embodiment, the movable member 78 has a built-in vibrator motor 78b, and the movable member 78 is driven by driving the vibrator motor 78b. It is configured to be able to vibrate (see FIG. 75).

  Further, in the same manner as that shown in FIG. 1 in the first embodiment, in this embodiment, an operation means in which the stick controller 122 and the push button 120 are integrally attached is provided. However, vibrator motors 126 and 120a are respectively provided below and above the operating means (see FIGS. 76 to 78). In this embodiment, the vibrator motor 126 is driven in accordance with the operation of the stick controller 122 to vibrate below the operation means, so that the stick controller 122 is vibrated in conjunction with the operation of the stick controller 122. Control as you do. Further, the vibrator motor 120a is driven in accordance with the operation of the push button 120 to vibrate above the operation means, so that the periphery of the push button 120 is vibrated in conjunction with the operation of the push button 120. Take control.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the vibrator motor 126 for vibration of the stick controller 122 and the vibrator motor 120a for vibration around the push button 120 are separately provided is shown. A common vibration means (vibrator motor) may be provided for the stick controller 122 vibration and the push button 120 peripheral vibration.

  In this embodiment, for example, in the effect control process shown in FIG. 35, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a hold change notice effect determining process for determining a hold change notice effect.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a hold change notice effect determination process in the fifth embodiment. In the pending change notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 firstly sets one set of start winning commands (that is, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a start prize designation command (a first start prize designation command or a second start). It is confirmed whether or not a (winning designation command) and a set of combined pending storage number designation commands) have been received (step S6501). Specifically, one set of symbol designation command, variable category command, and start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command) in the start prize command storage area for storing a command at the start prize. , And whether or not the total pending storage number designation command is newly stored. If a command for starting winning a set is not newly received, the process is terminated as it is.

  If a command at the time of a start winning prize is newly received, the CPU 101 for effect control determines whether or not the hold change notice effect determination flag indicating that the hold change notice effect has already been determined is set. Confirmation is made (step S6502). If the hold change notice effect determination flag is set, the processing is ended as it is.

  After the process of step S6502 is executed, after the execution of the hold change notice effect is determined based on the occurrence of a new start prize, the next variation display has not yet started and the display form of the hold display of the notice object When a new start prize is generated during a period in which no change has yet been made, control is performed so that the pending change notice effect is not determined repeatedly.

  If the hold change notice effect determination flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the current total number of reserved memories is 2 or more (step S6503). Whether or not the current total pending storage number is 2 or more is specifically stored in the total pending storage number storage area for storing the total pending storage number specified by the total pending storage number designation command. It can be determined by checking the value. If the total pending storage number is not 2 or more, the processing is terminated as it is.

  In this embodiment, when the hold change notice effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display is changed at the timing of the first to third hold display shift after the start winning. In this case, the display mode of the hold display cannot be changed at the timing of the shift of the hold display unless at least two total hold memories are accumulated at the start winning prize timing. Therefore, in this embodiment, by executing the determination process in step S6503, when the total pending storage number is 2 or more, the pending change notice effect can be executed, and the pending change notice effect is determined. In addition, at the timing of the hold display shift, a situation in which the hold display to be notified is already digested and the display mode cannot be changed is prevented.

  Even when the total number of pending storages is 1, it may be configured to be able to execute some change notice effect. In this case, for example, after the start winning is generated, the effect of changing the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area 9A is executed even after the hold display for the advance notice is shifted and deleted. You may comprise. Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a hold change notice effect with an action effect is executed when the hold display is shifted and the change display is started. For example, it may be configured to execute the hold change notice effect accompanied by the effect effect during the variable display such as after 10 seconds or after 15 seconds. In this case, even if the total pending storage number is 1, if the execution timing of the hold change notice effect remains in the remaining time of the currently displayed variable display, the hold change notice effect is executed. May be.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in the order of winning in the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. In gaming machines configured to give priority to the variable display of symbols, the variable display of the second special symbol is mostly executed in the high base state, and the execution ratio of the variable display of the first special symbol is high in the low base state. Therefore, only the prefetch determination for the first reserved memory may be executed during the low base state, and only the prefetch determination for the second reserved memory may be executed during the high base state. In this case, in step S6503, when the low base state is set, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number that is the target of the prefetch determination is 2 or more. It may be configured to determine whether or not the second reserved storage number that is the target of the above is two or more.

  If the total pending storage number is 2 or more, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence and type of the pending change notice effect based on the received latest variation category command (step S6504). In step S6504, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the hold change notice effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the hold change notice effect, Determine the type.

  The “hold change notice effect” is an effect of changing the hold display to a special display mode (in this example, blue or red round display) different from the normal mode (in this example, white round display). . In this embodiment, when the hold change notice effect is executed, the action effect is executed at the timing of the hold display shift, and the effect that the hold display is changed to any special display mode is executed.

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the hold change notice effect determination table in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, the hold change notice effect determination table includes no hold change notice effect, hold change notice effects A-1 to A-3, and hold change notice effects B-1 to B-. 3. Determination values are assigned to the hold change notice effects C-1 to C-3, the hold change notice effects D-1 to D-3, and the hold change notice effects E-1 to E-2, respectively. .

  The on-hold change notice effects A-1 to A-3 are on-hold change notice effects that perform a character effect as an action effect at the timing of the hold display shift and do not involve the action of a movable object as will be described later. Of these, when the hold change notice effect A-1 is executed, only the character effect is executed, and the display mode of the hold display does not change. In addition, when the hold change notice effect A-2 is executed, the character effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display subject to notice changes to a blue round display. In addition, when the hold change notice effect A-3 is executed, the character effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes to a red round display.

  The on-hold change notice effects B-1 to B-3 are on-hold change notice effects that execute an accessory effect as an action effect at the timing of the hold display shift. Among these, when the hold change notice effect B-1 is executed, only the movable member 78 as the movable object vibrates, and the change of the display mode of the hold display does not occur. The operation of the movable member 78 in such a manner as to cover a part of the display screen 9 is not performed. In addition, when the hold change notice effect B-2 is executed, after the movable member 78 as a movable object vibrates, the display mode of the hold display of the notice object changes to a blue round display, and the notice object is displayed. The movable member 78 operates in such a manner as to cover a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the timing when the display mode of the hold display changes. In addition, when the hold change notice effect B-3 is executed, after the movable member 78 as a movable object vibrates, the display mode of the hold display of the notice object changes to a red round display, and the notice object is displayed. The movable member 78 operates in such a manner as to cover a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the timing when the display mode of the hold display changes.

  The hold change notice effects C-1 to C-3 are hold change notice effects that execute push button operation suggesting effects as action effects at the timing of shifting the hold display. Among these, when the hold change notice effect C-1 is executed, the push button operation suggesting effect is executed and only the operation of the push button 120 is suggested. Even if the push button 120 is pressed, the hold display is performed. No change occurs in the display mode, and the vibration operation around the push button 120 as a movable object as described later is not performed. Further, when the hold change notice effect C-2 is executed, after the push button operation suggesting effect is executed and the operation of the push button 120 is suggested, the notice target is held according to the pressing operation of the push button 120. The display mode of the display changes to a blue round display, and the vicinity of the push button 120 vibrates at the timing when the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes. Further, when the hold change notice effect C-3 is executed, after the push button operation suggesting effect is executed and the operation of the push button 120 is suggested, the object to be notified is held according to the pressing operation of the push button 120. The display mode of the display changes to a red round display, and the vicinity of the push button 120 vibrates at the timing when the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes.

  In this embodiment, there are two modes of vibration around the push button 120: weak vibration and strong vibration. In this embodiment, when the hold change notice effect C-2 is executed and the hold display to be notified changes to a blue round display, the vicinity of the push button 120 vibrates weakly. Further, when the hold change notice effect C-3 is executed and the hold display to be notified changes to a red round display, the vicinity of the push button 120 vibrates strongly.

  On-hold change notice effects D-1 to D-3 are on-hold change notice effects that execute stick controller operation suggestion effects as action effects at the timing of the shift of the hold display. Of these, when the hold change notice effect D-1 is executed, the stick controller operation suggesting effect is executed and only the operation of the stick controller 122 is suggested. Even if the stick controller 122 is tilted, the hold display is displayed. No change occurs in the display mode, and the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 as a movable object as described later is not performed. Further, when the hold change notice effect D-2 is executed, after the stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed and the operation of the stick controller 122 is suggested, the notice target is held according to the tilting operation of the stick controller 122. The display mode of the display changes to a blue round display, and the stick controller 122 vibrates at the timing when the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes. When the hold change notice effect D-3 is executed, the stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed and the operation of the stick controller 122 is suggested, and then the notice target is held according to the tilting operation of the stick controller 122. The display mode of the display changes to a red round display, and the stick controller 122 vibrates at the timing when the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes.

  In this embodiment, the vibration mode of the stick controller 122 includes two vibration modes: weak vibration and strong vibration. In this embodiment, when the hold change notice effect D-2 is executed and the notice target hold display changes to a blue round display, the stick controller 122 vibrates weakly. Further, when the hold change notice effect D-3 is executed and the hold display to be notified changes to a red round display, the stick controller 122 vibrates strongly.

  In this embodiment, the stick controller 122 may vibrate before the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed. The hold change notice effects E-1 to E-2 are hold change notice effects in which the stick controller 122 vibrates before the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes. Among these, when the hold change notice effect E-1 is executed, after the weak vibration of the stick controller 122 is started and the stick controller operation suggesting effect is executed to suggest the operation of the stick controller 122, the stick In accordance with the tilting operation of the controller 122, the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes to a blue round display, and the weak vibration of the stick controller 122 continues. When the hold change notice effect E-2 is executed, after the weak vibration of the stick controller 122 is started and the stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed to indicate the operation of the stick controller 122, the stick controller 122 In response to the tilting operation 122, the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes to a red round display, and the vibration mode of the stick controller 122 changes to strong vibration.

  However, in this embodiment, even if it is the hold change notice effect E-1 to E-2, if the tilting operation by the stick controller 122 is not performed, the display mode of the hold display does not change, and the stick It is assumed that the weak fluctuation of the controller 122 is also stopped. In addition, not only in such a mode, when the tilt operation by the stick controller 122 is not performed and the display mode of the hold display does not change, the stick controller 122 may be configured not to be changed with a slight fluctuation. .

  In this embodiment, when the hold change notice effects E-1 to E-2 are executed, the stick controller 122 is shown to vibrate slightly before the notice display of the hold display to be notified changes. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the stick controller 122 may be configured to vibrate strongly before the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed. Also, for example, when executing the hold change notice effect E-1, when the stick controller 122 is weakly vibrated before the notice mode of the hold indication to be notified changes, and the hold change notice effect E-2 is executed. May be configured such that the stick controller 122 is vibrated strongly before the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, when the determination result indicated by the variable category command is non-reach out of position or when the super reach is out of alignment, the determination result indicated by the variable category command is a super reach big hit. In some cases, execution of the pending change notice effect may be determined.

  As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, when the super reach is off, the rate at which any one of the pending change notice effects is executed is higher than when the non-reach is off. . In addition, in the case of a super reach big hit, the rate at which any one of the pending change notice effects is executed is higher than in the case where the super reach is lost. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the pending change notice effect is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit or the super reach is higher than when it is not executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, even if the hold change notice effect is executed, there are cases where the display mode of the hold display of the notice object changes and there are cases where it does not change. In this case, the proportion of the hold display to be notified changes to either blue or red round display is higher than that in the case of non-reach. In addition, in the case of a super reach big hit, the ratio that the hold display to be notified changes to either a blue or red round display is higher than in the case where the super reach is lost. Therefore, in this embodiment, the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit or super reach is higher when the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed than when it is not changed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, when non-reach occurs, there is only a case where the hold display to be notified changes to a blue round display (when it changes to a red round display). On the other hand, when the super reach is lost or the super reach is a big hit, there are both cases of changing to a blue round display and cases of changing to a red round display. In addition, when the super reach is a big hit, the ratio that the hold display to be notified changes to the red round display rather than the blue round display is higher than when the super reach is lost. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the notice display is changed to the red round display, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit or super reach is changed compared to the case of the blue round display. Is high.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, a character effect, an accessory effect, a push button operation suggesting effect, and a stick controller operation suggesting effect are executed as the effect effect executed in the hold change notice effect. Depending on which type of action effect is executed, the determination value allocation in the pending change notice effect determination table is different. For example, when a push button operation suggestion effect or a stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed, a notice display of a hold target for a notice in the case of a super reach jackpot, compared to a case where a character effect or an accessory effect is executed The rate of change of the notice target is high, and the rate of change to the red round display is high.

  In this embodiment, when the push button operation suggestion effect or the stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed, the operation means such as the stick controller 122 or the push button 120 is operated. The determination value allocation in the pending change notice effect determination table differs depending on whether the operation is accompanied. For example, when the stick controller operation effect is executed and the operation of the stick controller 122 is performed, the notice target in the case of a super reach big hit is compared with the case where the push button operation effect is executed and the push button 120 is operated. The display mode of the hold display is changed to increase the rate at which the operating means vibrates, and the rate at which the operating means is strongly changed by changing to a red round display is increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the hold change notice effect accompanied by the operation of the stick controller 122 is executed, the stick controller 122 vibrates before the notice display of the hold display to be noticed changes (hold change notice). Production E-1 through E-2). As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, if the stick controller 122 vibrates before the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed, the stick controller 122 is always tilted. Since the hold display for the advance notice changes to a blue or red round display (the hold display does not change), the stick controller 122 has vibrated before the display form of the hold display for the advance notice changes. For example, it is determined that at least the hold display to be notified changes to either blue or red round display.

  Note that the push button 120 may be configured to vibrate before the display mode of the hold display for the advance notice changes, for example, without limiting to the form shown in this embodiment. You may comprise so that it may decide to change to either a blue or red round shape display. It may be configured that if any of the operating means vibrates before the display mode of the hold display for the advance notice changes, the hold display for the advance notice changes to a red round display. Good.

  Note that the hold change notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 68 is an example, and various configurations of the hold change notice effect determination table are conceivable. For example, in this embodiment, in the case of non-reach, it is configured so that the hold display to be notified only changes to a blue round display, but the red round display at a low rate You may comprise so that it may change to. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where there are only two types of the blue display and the red display as the change mode of the hold display is shown, it is not limited to such a mode, and there are three or more types. You may comprise so that there may be this change aspect. In this case, for example, it may be configured to change to a green round display or a cherry pattern round display, or it is reserved in a different shape (for example, a star shape or a heart shape). You may comprise so that a display may change. Further, for example, when the hold display is changed to a specific mode (for example, a round display of cherry blossoms or a star display), it may be configured that the big hit is confirmed. Further, for example, it may be configured such that the display mode of the hold display is changed whenever the hold change notice effect is executed, and the hold change notice effect is not executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 68, when an effect effect other than the character effect, a push button operation suggestion effect, or a stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed as the effect effect, the display mode of the hold display for the notice target changes. Although the case where the movable member 78 always operates at the timing and the stick controller 122 and the push button 120 always perform the vibration operation is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, even when the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes, a case where the movable member 78 operates and a case where the movable member 78 does not operate is provided, and a case where the stick controller 122 and the push button 120 perform a vibration operation and vibration operation You may comprise so that it may be provided. In this case, even if the hold display to be notified changes to the same blue or red round display, the big hit depends on whether or not the movable member 78 is operated and whether or not the stick controller 122 or the push button 120 is vibrated. Alternatively, the degree of expectation (reliability) for super reach may be different.

  Further, when configured as described above, for example, the hold display to be notified changes to a red round display, but the operation of the movable member 78 and the vibration operation around the stick controller 122 or the push button 120 are absent. In the case where the hold display to be notified changes to a blue round display, but the operation of the movable member 78 or the vibration operation around the stick controller 122 or the push button 120, the degree of expectation for the big hit or super reach (reliability) ) May be high. With such a configuration, for example, since the presence or absence of the vibration operation around the stick controller 122 and the push button 120 cannot be recognized unless operated, the player's willingness to operate can be further urged.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that there may be a change pattern which changes a pending | holding display in multiple times. For example, when there are two or more fluctuation displays before the notice display, the hold display is changed from the normal mode (white round display) to the blue round display by the first fluctuation display. There may be a change pattern in which the hold display is further changed from the blue round display to the red round display in the first fluctuation display.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where a different type of movable body (in this example, the movable member 78, the stick controller 122, or the push button 120) is operated according to the type of the hold change notice effect is shown. The same movable body may be operated regardless of the type of change notice effect. In this case, a common movable body may be operated regardless of the type of the pending change notice effect, or a plurality of common movable bodies may be operated. For example, the stick controller 122 may be configured to vibrate regardless of the type of the hold change notice effect, or the movable member 78, the stick controller 122, and the push may be commonly used regardless of the type of the hold change notice effect. You may comprise so that all the buttons 120 may operate | move.

  When execution of the hold notice effect is determined (Y in step S6505), the effect control CPU 101 determines a hold change timing for changing the display mode of the hold display (step S6506). In step S6506, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the hold change timing determination table for determining the hold change timing, and determines the hold change timing.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the hold change timing determination table according to the fifth embodiment. Among these, FIG. 69 (A) shows a specific example of a hold change timing determination table (for the sum hold memory number 2) used when the sum hold memory number is two. FIG. 69 (B) shows a specific example of the hold change timing determination table (for the combined hold storage number 3) used when the combined hold storage number is 3. FIG. 69 (C) shows a specific example of a hold change timing determination table (for a sum of four or more pending storages) used when the total number of pending storages is four or more.

  In step S6506, the production control CPU 101 first checks the current total pending storage number, and if the total pending storage number is 2, the pending change timing determination table (for the total pending storage number 2) shown in FIG. ) Is selected, a lottery process based on a random number is performed using the selected hold change timing determination table (for the total hold memory number 2), and the hold change timing is determined. If the total pending storage number is 3, the pending change timing determination table (for the total pending storage number 3) shown in FIG. 69B is selected, and the selected pending change timing determination table (for the total pending storage number 3) is selected. A lottery process based on a random number is performed using and the hold change timing is determined. If the total pending storage number is 4 or more, the pending change timing determination table (for the total pending storage number 4 or more) shown in FIG. 69C is selected, and the selected pending change timing determination table (total pending storage number 4) is selected. For the above, a lottery process based on a random number is performed to determine the hold change timing.

  When the total number of reserved storage is 2, after the start winning, the display timing of the hold display is only once, so as shown in FIG. 69 (A), non-reach out, super reach out, and super reach out In any case of the big hit, the timing of the first hold display shift is determined as the hold change timing at a rate of 100%.

  In addition, when the total number of reserved storage is 3, after the start winning, there are two timings of the hold display shift, so the timing of the first or second hold display shift is determined as the hold change timing. . In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), in the case of a super reach big hit, the second hold display shift is performed at a higher rate than in the case of a super reach losing or non-reach losing. Is determined as the pending change timing. In addition, as shown in FIG. 69B, when the super reach is shifted, the second hold display shift timing is determined as the hold change timing at a higher rate than the non-reach shift. To do. Therefore, in this embodiment, the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit or super reach increases as the timing at which the display mode of the hold display changes is delayed.

  In addition, when the total number of reserved storage is 4 or more, the timing of shifting the hold display after the start winning is 3 times, so the timing of the first to third hold display shift is determined as the hold change timing. To do. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), in the case of a super reach big hit, the third hold display shift is performed at a higher rate than in the case where the super reach is lost or non-reach is lost. Is determined as the pending change timing. In addition, as shown in FIG. 69C, when the super reach shifts, the shift timing of the second or third hold display shift is held at a higher rate than when the non-reach shift occurs. Determine as timing. Therefore, in this embodiment, the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit or super reach increases as the timing at which the display mode of the hold display changes is delayed.

  The hold change timing determination table shown in FIG. 69 is an example, and various hold change timing determination table configurations are possible. For example, in this embodiment, if the total pending storage number is 4 or more, the pending change timing is determined uniformly using the pending change timing determination table (for the total pending storage number 4 or more) shown in FIG. However, a hold change timing determination table for the total hold storage number 5 or a hold change timing determination table for the sum hold storage number 6 may be provided. Further, in this case, for example, the fourth and subsequent hold display shift timings may be determined as the hold change timing.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit or super reach becomes higher as the timing at which the display mode of the hold display changes is delayed, but conversely, the display mode of the hold display It may be configured such that the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit or super reach becomes higher as the timing at which changes changes. Further, for example, when the display mode of the hold display is changed at a certain specific timing, it may be configured to be determined to be a big hit or super reach.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a pending change notice effect determination flag (step S6507). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 determines the type of the hold change notice effect determined in step S6504 (in this example, the hold change notice effects A-1 to A-3, B-1 to B-3, C-1 to C-). 3, D-1 to D-3, E-1 to E-2), and the hold change timing determined in step S6506 are stored in the hold change notice effect storage area provided in the RAM (step S6508). In step S6508, the effect control CPU 101 may set a counter for measuring the arrival of the hold change timing determined in step S6506, for example.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) according to the fifth embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes in steps S8000 and S8001 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs a predetermined display in the active display area 9 </ b> A of the effect display device 9 in the same display mode as the first hold display displayed on the summed hold storage display unit 18 c of the effect display device 9. Active display) is displayed (step S8002). For example, when the first hold display displayed in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is in a normal mode (in this example, a white round display), the active display area 9A has a white display as a predetermined display. Display a round display. Further, for example, when the first hold display displayed in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is a blue round display, a blue round display is displayed as a predetermined display in the active display area 9A. . For example, when the first hold display displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c is a red round display, a red round display is displayed as a predetermined display in the active display area 9A. .

  In this embodiment, the command transmitted at the start of variation is the interval for each timer interrupt (4 ms interval) in the order of the background designation command, variation pattern command, display result designation command, and total pending memory count subtraction designation command. ) (See FIGS. 23 to 27). Accordingly, in the effect symbol variation start process executed at the stage of receiving up to the display result designation command, the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has not yet been received, and the pending display is not yet shifted and added up at the stage of step S8002. The hold display corresponding to the variable display to be started this time should still remain in the hold storage display unit 18c. Therefore, in step S8002, the first hold display (hold display corresponding to the variable display started this time) displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c is confirmed, and the active display is displayed in the same display mode. You are in control.

  In step S8002, after a predetermined display (active display) is displayed in the active display area 9A, a total pending storage number subtraction designation command is received at the next timer interrupt (after 4 ms), and 1 is added from the total pending storage display unit 18c. Since the first hold display is erased, when viewed from the player, it appears that the first hold display of the combined hold storage display portion 18c has shifted to the active display area 9A almost simultaneously.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the hold change notice effect determination flag is set (step S8501). If the hold change notice effect determination flag is set, it is confirmed whether or not the hold change timing is reached (step S8502).

  Whether or not it is the hold change timing is determined by, for example, setting a value corresponding to the hold change timing determined in step S6506 of the hold change notice effect determination process in the counter and starting the variable display (every time it ends). Alternatively, the value of the counter is decremented by 1, and the determination can be made by checking whether or not the value of the counter is 0 in step S8502. For example, when the hold change timing is determined as the timing of the first hold display shift, 1 is set in the counter, and then the counter value is decremented by 1 at the timing when the first variable display is started. Therefore, it can be determined that the hold change timing has arrived at the timing of the first hold display shift. Further, for example, when the hold change timing is determined as the timing of the second hold display shift, 2 is set in the counter, and then the counter is decremented by 1 each time the change display is started, and the second change display is performed. Since the value of the counter becomes 0 at the timing of starting the hold, it can be determined that the hold change timing has arrived at the timing of the second hold display shift. Further, for example, when the hold change timing is determined to be the shift timing of the third hold display, the counter is set to 3, and then the counter is decremented by 1 each time the change display is started, and the third change display is performed. Since the value of the counter becomes 0 at the timing of starting the hold, it can be determined that the hold change timing has arrived at the timing of the third hold display shift.

  If it is not the pending change timing (N of step S8502), the process proceeds to step S8019. If it is the hold change timing (Y in step S8502), the effect control CPU 101 resets the hold change notice effect determination flag (step S8503). Further, the production control CPU 101 confirms the type of the pending change announcement effect stored in the pending change announcement effect storage area (see step S6508) provided in the RAM, and processes according to the variation pattern and the pending change announcement effect. A table is selected (step S8504). Then, control goes to a step S8020.

  If the hold change notice effect determination flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the display mode of the active display displayed in step S8002 is the normal mode (step S8505). If it is not the normal mode, the process proceeds to step S8019. That is, the fact that the display mode of the active display is not the normal mode (that is, the blue or red round display) is a case where the hold change notice effect is already executed for the variable display that starts this time. The processing of steps S8506 to S8509 is not executed, and control is performed so that active display change notice effects described later are not executed repeatedly.

  Note that, for example, the hold display can be changed a plurality of times (for example, the white round display in the normal mode can be changed to the blue round display at the first time and the red round display can be changed the second time). In such a case, even if it is not the normal mode in step S8505, if it is not the final display mode (for example, blue round display), a display mode that can be further changed remains. Therefore, the process may proceed to step S8506 and subsequent steps so that the active display change notice effect can be executed.

  If the display mode of the active display is the normal mode (that is, white round display), the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence and type of the active display change notice effect based on the received variation pattern command (step) S8506). In step S8506, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the active display change notice effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the active display change notice effect, and the active display change notice effect. Determine the presence and type.

  The “active display change notice effect” is an effect that changes the active display to a special display mode (in this example, blue or red round display) different from the normal mode (in this example, white round display). is there. In this embodiment, when the active display change notice effect is executed, the display of the active display is started in the normal mode at the start of the change, and then the action effect is executed during the change display and any of the active displays is performed. An effect that changes to the special display mode is executed.

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of an active display change notice effect determination table according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, the active display change notice effect determination table includes no active display change notice effect, active display change notice effects A-1 to A-3, and active display change notice effect B-. 1 to B-3, active display change notice effects C-1 to C-3, active display change notice effects D-1 to D-3, and active display change notice effects E-1 to E-2, respectively. Judgment value is assigned.

  The active display change notice effects A-1 to A-3 are active display change notice effects that perform a character effect as an action effect and do not involve the action of a movable object as will be described later. Among these, when the active display change notice effect A-1 is executed, only the character effect is executed, and the display mode of the active display is not changed. Further, when the active display change notice effect A-2 is executed, the character effect is executed and the display mode of the active display changes to a blue round display. Further, when the active display change notice effect A-3 is executed, the character effect is executed and the display mode of the active display is changed to a red round display.

  The active display change notice effects B-1 to B-3 are active display change notice effects that execute an accessory effect as an action effect. Among these, when the active display change notice effect B-1 is executed, only the movable member 78 as the movable object vibrates, and the display mode of the active display does not change. The operation of the movable member 78 in such a manner as to cover a part of the display screen of the device 9 is not performed. In addition, when the active display change notice effect B-2 is executed, after the movable member 78 as a movable object vibrates, the display mode of the active display changes to a blue round display, and the active display display The movable member 78 operates in such a manner as to cover a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the timing when the manner changes. In addition, when the active display change notice effect B-3 is executed, after the movable member 78 as a movable object vibrates, the display mode of the active display changes to a red round display, and the active display display The movable member 78 operates in such a manner as to cover a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the timing when the manner changes.

  The active display change notice effects C-1 to C-3 are active display change notice effects that execute push button operation suggesting effects as action effects. Among these, when the active display change notice effect C-1 is executed, the push button operation suggesting effect is executed and only the operation of the push button 120 is suggested, and the active even if the push button 120 is pressed. The display mode of the display does not change, and the vibration operation around the push button 120 as a movable object as described later is not performed. In addition, when the active display change notice effect C-2 is executed, the push button operation suggesting effect is executed and the operation of the push button 120 is suggested, and then the active display is changed according to the pressing operation of the push button 120. The display mode changes to a blue round display, and the periphery of the push button 120 vibrates at the timing when the display mode of the active display changes. Further, when the active display change notice effect C-3 is executed, after the push button operation suggesting effect is executed and the operation of the push button 120 is suggested, the active display is changed according to the pressing operation of the push button 120. The display mode changes to a red round display, and the periphery of the push button 120 vibrates at the timing when the display mode of the active display changes.

  In this embodiment, there are two modes of vibration around the push button 120: weak vibration and strong vibration. In this embodiment, when the active display change notice effect C-2 is executed and the active display changes to a blue round display, the vicinity of the push button 120 vibrates weakly. Further, when the active display change notice effect C-3 is executed and the active display changes to a red round display, the vicinity of the push button 120 vibrates strongly.

  Active display change notice effects D-1 to D-3 are active display change notice effects that execute stick controller operation suggestion effects as action effects. Among these, when the active display change notice effect D-1 is executed, the stick controller operation suggesting effect is executed and only the operation of the stick controller 122 is suggested, and the active even if the stick controller 122 is tilted. The display mode of the display does not change, and the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 as a movable object as described later is not performed. In addition, when the active display change notice effect D-2 is executed, after the stick controller operation suggesting effect is executed and the operation of the stick controller 122 is suggested, the active display is changed according to the tilting operation of the stick controller 122. The stick controller 122 vibrates at the timing when the display mode changes to a blue round display and the display mode of the active display changes. Further, when the active display change notice effect D-3 is executed, after the stick controller operation suggesting effect is executed and the operation of the stick controller 122 is suggested, the active display is changed according to the tilting operation of the stick controller 122. The stick controller 122 vibrates at the timing when the display mode changes to a red round display and the display mode of the active display changes.

  In this embodiment, the vibration mode of the stick controller 122 includes two vibration modes: weak vibration and strong vibration. In this embodiment, when the active display change notice effect D-2 is executed and the active display changes to a blue round display, the stick controller 122 vibrates weakly. Also, when the active display change notice effect D-3 is executed and the active display changes to a red round display, the stick controller 122 vibrates strongly.

  In this embodiment, the stick controller 122 may vibrate before the display mode of the active display changes. The active display change notice effects E-1 to E-2 are active display change notice effects in which the stick controller 122 vibrates before the display mode of the active display changes. Among these, when the active display change notice effect E-1 is executed, after the weak vibration of the stick controller 122 is started and the stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed and the operation of the stick controller 122 is suggested, In response to the tilting operation of the stick controller 122, the display mode of the active display changes to a blue round display, and the weak vibration of the stick controller 122 continues. In addition, when the active display change notice effect E-2 is executed, after the weak vibration of the stick controller 122 is started and the stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed to suggest the operation of the stick controller 122, the stick In accordance with the tilting operation of the controller 122, the display mode of the active display changes to a red round display, and the vibration mode of the stick controller 122 changes to strong vibration.

  However, in this embodiment, even if it is the active display change notice effect E-1 to E-2, if the tilt operation by the stick controller 122 is not performed, the display mode of the active display does not change, It is assumed that the weak fluctuation of the stick controller 122 is also stopped. In addition, not only in such a mode, when the tilt operation by the stick controller 122 is not performed and the display mode of the active display does not change, the stick controller 122 may be configured not to be changed with a weak fluctuation. .

  In this embodiment, when the active display change notice effects E-1 to E-2 are executed, the stick controller 122 is vibrated weakly before the display mode of the active display is changed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the stick controller 122 may be configured to vibrate strongly before the display mode of the active display changes. Further, for example, when executing the active display change notice effect E-1, when the stick controller 122 is weakly vibrated before the display mode of the active display is changed, the active display change notice effect E-2 is executed. The stick controller 122 may be configured to vibrate strongly before the display mode of the active display changes.

  As shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command is a non-reach variation pattern, a reach variation variation pattern, or a big hit variation pattern. The execution of the active display change notice effect may be determined.

  As shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, when the super reach is shifted, the rate at which one of the active display change notice effects is executed is higher than when the non-reach is shifted. Yes. Further, in the case of a super reach big hit, the rate at which any one of the active display change notice effects is executed is higher than in the case where the super reach is lost. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the active display change notice effect is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit and super reach is higher than when the active display change notice effect is not executed.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, even if the active display change notice effect is executed, there are cases where the display mode of the active display changes and cases where it does not change, but the super reach is shifted. In such a case, the rate at which the active display changes to either blue or red round display is higher than that in the case of non-reach. Further, when the super reach hit is big, the ratio of the active display changing to either blue or red round display is higher than when super reach is lost. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the display mode of the active display is changed, the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit and the super reach is higher than when the display mode is not changed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, when non-reach is lost, the active display can only be changed to a blue round display (it does not change to a red round display). On the other hand, when the super reach is lost or the super reach is a big hit, there are both cases of changing to a blue round display and cases of changing to a red round display. Further, when the super reach hit is big, the rate at which the active display changes from the blue round display to the red round display is higher than when the super reach is lost. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the active display is changed to the red round display, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit and the super reach is higher than when the active display is changed to the blue round display. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, a character effect, an accessory effect, a push button operation suggesting effect, and a stick controller operation suggesting effect are executed as action effects executed in the active display change notice effect. In some cases, the allocation of determination values in the active display change notice effect determination table differs depending on which type of effect effect is executed. For example, when the push button operation suggestion effect or the stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed, the active display notice target in the case of a super reach big hit is compared with the case where the character effect or the accessory effect is executed. The rate of change is high, and the rate of change to red round display is high.

  In this embodiment, when the push button operation suggestion effect or the stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed, the operation means such as the stick controller 122 or the push button 120 is operated. The determination value allocation in the active display change notice effect determination table differs depending on whether the operation is accompanied. For example, when the stick controller operation effect is executed and the operation of the stick controller 122 is performed, the active display in the case of the super reach big hit is compared with the case where the push button operation effect is executed and the operation of the push button 120 is performed. The display mode changes and the rate at which the operating means vibrates increases, and the rate at which the operating means changes strongly by changing to a red round display increases.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the active display change notice effect accompanied by the operation of the stick controller 122 is executed, the stick controller 122 vibrates before the display mode of the active display changes (active display change notice effect). E-1 to E-2). As shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, when the stick controller 122 vibrates before the display mode of the active display changes, the active display is always displayed if the stick controller 122 is tilted. Since the display changes to a blue or red round display (the active display does not change), if the stick controller 122 vibrates before the display mode of the active display changes, at least the active display is blue or red. It will be determined that the display changes to one of the round displays.

  It should be noted that the push button 120 may be configured to vibrate before the display mode of the active display changes, and the active display is a blue or red round shape. You may comprise so that it may determine that it changes in any of display. If any of the operation means has oscillated before the display mode of the active display is changed, it may be configured that the active display is determined to change to a red round display.

  The active display change notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 71 is an example, and various configurations of the active display change notice effect determination table can be considered. For example, in this embodiment, in the case of non-reach, the active display is configured to change only to a blue round display, but changes to a red round display at a low rate. You may comprise so that there may be a case. Further, in this embodiment, the case where there are only two types of change modes of the active display, that is, a blue round display and a red round display, is shown. You may comprise so that there may be this change aspect. In this case, for example, it may be configured to change to a green round display or a cherry pattern round display, or active in a different shape (for example, a star shape or a heart shape). You may comprise so that a display may change. Further, for example, when the active display is changed to a specific mode (for example, a round display of cherry blossoms or a star display), it may be configured that the big hit is determined. Further, for example, the active display change notice effect may be changed whenever the active display change notice effect is executed, and the active display change notice effect of the gas display may not be executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 71, when an effect effect other than a character effect, a push button operation suggestion effect, or a stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed as the action effect, the timing at which the display mode of the active display is changed. Although the case where the movable member 78 always operates and the stick controller 122 and the push button 120 always perform the vibration operation is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, even when the display mode of the active display changes, a case where the movable member 78 operates and a case where the movable member 78 does not operate are provided, a case where the stick controller 122 and the push button 120 perform a vibration operation, and a case where the vibration operation does not occur. May be provided. In this case, even if the active display changes to the same blue or red round display, the big hit or super reach is determined depending on whether the movable member 78 is operated or whether the stick controller 122 or the push button 120 is vibrated. You may comprise so that the expectation degree (reliability) with respect to may differ.

  Further, when configured as described above, for example, the active display is changed to a red circular display, but the active display is more active than the case where there is no operation of the movable member 78 or vibration operation around the stick controller 122 or the push button 120. Is changed to a blue round display, but the expectation (reliability) for big hits and super reach is higher when there is an operation of the movable member 78 or a vibration operation around the stick controller 122 or the push button 120. It may be configured. With such a configuration, for example, since the presence or absence of the vibration operation around the stick controller 122 and the push button 120 cannot be recognized unless operated, the player's willingness to operate can be further urged.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that there may be a change pattern which changes an active display in multiple times. For example, when the variable display for executing the active display change notice effect is a variable display with pseudo-continuous, the active display is changed from the normal mode (white round display) to the blue round display by the first re-variation. It may be configured such that there is a change pattern in which the active display is further changed from the blue round display to the red round display by the second re-change.

  In this embodiment, the case where a different type of movable body (in this example, the movable member 78, the stick controller 122, or the push button 120) operates according to the type of the active display change notice effect is shown. The same movable body may be operated regardless of the type of the active display change notice effect. In this case, it may be configured such that one common movable body operates regardless of the type of active display change notice effect, or a plurality of common movable bodies may operate. For example, the stick controller 122 may be configured to vibrate in common regardless of the type of the active display change notice effect, or the movable member 78, the stick controller 122, In addition, all of the push buttons 120 may be configured to operate.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68 and FIG. 71, separate determination processing is performed using separate tables when determining the pending change notice effect and when determining the active display change notice effect. Thus, the processing mode is not limited to the case where the presence / absence and type of the hold change notice effect or the active display change notice effect are determined. For example, in the hold change notice effect determination process of FIG. 67 executed at the start winning prize, the presence / absence and type of the hold change notice effect and the active display change notice effect are collectively determined by a determination process 1 using a common table. You may comprise as follows.

  If the execution of the active display change notice effect is determined (Y in step S8507), the effect control CPU 101 determines the type of the active display change notice effect determined in step S8506 (in this example, the active display change notice effect). A-1 to A-3, B-1 to B-3, C-1 to C-3, D-1 to D-3, E-1 to E-2), an active display change provided in the RAM The information is stored in the notice effect storage area (step S8508). Further, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern and the active display change notice effect (step S8509). Then, control goes to a step S8020.

  When the display mode of the active display is not the normal mode (N at Step S8505), when it is decided not to execute the active display change notice effect (N at Step S8507), or when it is not the hold change timing (Step S8502). In N), the production control CPU 101 selects a normal process table corresponding to the variation pattern (step S8019). Then, control goes to a step S8020.

  Note that the processes in steps S8020 to S8024 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  In this embodiment, in the production symbol variation start process, the processes in steps S8003 to S8018 shown in the first embodiment are omitted, but the processes in steps S8003 to S8018 are similarly performed in this embodiment. May be configured to change the hold display and the active display in a plurality of stages.

  FIG. 72 and FIG. 73 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the fifth embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes in steps S8101 to S8105 are the same as the processes shown in the first embodiment.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 101 executes the hold change notice effect or the active display change notice effect with the character effect as the action effect (the hold change notice effect A-1 to A-3 or the active display change notice effect A-1). ~ A-3 is executed), and it is confirmed whether or not it is the start timing of the character effect (step S8601). Note that the start timing of the character effect may be determined in advance by, for example, an effect control pattern. If it is the start timing of the character effect, the effect control CPU 101 displays the character on the effect display device 9 and starts executing the character effect (step S8602). Then, control goes to a step S8611.

  If it is not the start timing of the character effect, the effect control CPU 101 executes the hold change notice effect or the active display change notice effect accompanied by the accessory effect as the action effect (hold change notice effect B-1 to B-3 or Whether or not the active display change notice effects B-1 to B-3 are to be executed) and whether the start timing of the accessory effect is confirmed (step S8603). In addition, the start timing of an accessory effect should just be predetermined by the effect control pattern etc., for example. If it is the start timing of the accessory effect, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to drive the vibrator motor 78b and start the vibration operation of the movable member 78 (step S8604). Then, control goes to a step S8611.

  In this embodiment, the movable member 78 is vibrated as an effect effect, and then the movable member 78 moves greatly in such a manner that it covers a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 to display the hold. However, the present invention is not limited to such effects. For example, the movable member 78 is configured to incorporate a light emitting body such as an LED, and by performing light control on the LED, the actor plays a role in such a manner that the movable member 78 emits light. You may comprise so that it may speak. Further, for example, an effect display may be performed in the vicinity of the movable member 78 of the effect display device 9 (in this example, above the display screen) so as to give the player a sense of expectation.

  If it is not the start timing of the accessory effect, the effect control CPU 101 executes the hold change notice effect or the active display change notice effect accompanied with the push button operation suggestion effect as the action effect (hold change notice effect C-1 to C). -3 and active display change notice effects C-1 to C-3), it is checked whether or not the push button operation suggesting effect is started (step S8605). The start timing of the push button operation suggestion effect may be determined in advance by, for example, an effect control pattern. If it is the start timing of the push button operation suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 101 displays characters such as “Press the push button!” On the effect display device 9 and starts executing the push button operation suggestion effect ( Step S8606). Then, control goes to a step S8611.

  If it is not the start timing of the push button operation suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 101 executes the hold change notice effect or the active display change notice effect accompanied by the stick controller operation suggestion effect as the action effect (hold change notice effect D-1). ~ D-3, E-1 to E-2 and active display change notice effects D-1 to D-3, E-1 to E-2), and the stick controller operation suggestion effect start timing It is confirmed whether or not (step S8607). The start timing of the stick controller operation suggestion effect may be determined in advance by, for example, an effect control pattern. If it is the start timing of the stick controller operation suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 101 performs character display such as “Close the stick controller!” On the effect display device 9 and starts executing the stick controller operation suggestion effect ( Step S8608).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 before the notice display of the hold display to be notified changes (the hold change notice effect E-1 to E-2 or the active display change notice effect E). -1 to E-2 are executed) (step S8609). If the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 is started before the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed, the effect control CPU 101 drives the vibrator motor 126 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate by weak vibration. Is started (step S8610). Then, control goes to a step S8611.

  A plurality of types of push button operation suggesting effects and stick controller operation suggesting effects may be provided. For example, a character display such as “Press the push button!” Or “Drag the stick controller!” Is displayed in a large size or a small size, depending on which size is displayed. In addition, the degree of expectation as to whether the display mode of the hold display or active display changes, or the degree of expectation as to whether the display mode changes between blue round display and red round display may be different. .

  Further, in this embodiment, the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 may be started before the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed by executing the processes of steps S8609 to S8610. As a part of the push button operation suggestion effect and the stick controller operation suggestion effect, the push button operation suggestion effect and the stick controller operation suggestion effect accompanied by the vibration operation of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are configured to be executable. Also good.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the action effect end timing is reached (step S8611). Note that the end timing of the action effect may be determined in advance by, for example, an effect control pattern. If it is the end timing of the action effect, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the display mode of the hold display or the active display to be notified is changed (step S8612). Specifically, hold change notice effects A-2 to A-3, B-2 to B-3, C-2 to C-3, D-2 to D-3, E-1 to E-2 and active Display change notice effects A-2 to A-3, B-2 to B-3, C-2 to C-3, D-2 to D-3, and E-1 to E-2) For example, it can be determined that the display mode of the hold display or the active display to be notified is changed. Also, if the hold change notice effects A-1, B-1, C-1, D-1 and the active display change notice effects A-1, B-1, C-1, D-1 are executed). Therefore, it can be determined that the display mode of the hold display or the active display to be notified is not changed.

  If it is determined that the hold display or the active display to be notified is not changed (N in step S8612), the process ends as it is. In this case, the character display is erased and the character effect is ended, the vibration operation of the movable member 78 is stopped and the accessory effect is ended, or the push button operation suggestion effect and the stick controller operation suggestion effect are ended. The control of operating the movable member 78 in a manner that covers a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 without changing the display mode of the hold display and the active display, which will be described later, only by ending the action effect, There is no control for causing the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  In addition, when it determines with it being a case where the hold display and active display of a notice object are not changed (when it determines with N by step S8612), it has failed in change in each hold change notice effect or each active display change notice effect. It is desirable to configure so as to perform effect control for notification. For example, if a hold change notice effect or an active display change notice effect with a character effect is being executed, the hold display or the active display does not change, and a change is made by performing an effect display as if the character is disappointed. You may notify that it failed. In addition, for example, when a holding change notice effect or an active display change notice effect accompanied by an accessory effect is executed, the vibration operation of the movable member 78 is stopped or the light emission control of the movable member 78 is performed. In such a case, the light emission may be stopped, or if the effect display is being performed, the effect display may be deleted to notify that the change has failed. In addition, when a hold change notice effect or an active display change notice effect accompanied with a push button operation suggestion effect or a stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed, the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 is operated when the operation is performed. The button operation suggestion display and the stick controller operation suggestion display may be erased, and an effect sound corresponding to the change failure may be output or the LED or lamp emission control may be performed to notify that the change has failed.

  When it is determined that the hold display or the active display to be notified is changed (Y in step S8612), the effect control CPU 101 is executing the accessory effect (hold change notice effect B-2). Or B-3 or active display change notice effects B-2 to B-3) (step S8613). If it is a case where an effect effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 101 operates in such a manner that the movable member 78 is covered with a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 by driving the movable member motor 78a. Control is performed (step S8614). And it transfers to step S8621 and CPU101 for production control performs control which changes to the display mode which determined the hold display or active display of notification object (step SS8621). For example, if the hold change notice effect B-2 has been executed, the notice target hold display is changed to a blue round display, and if the hold change notice effect B-3 has been executed, a notice is given. Change the target hold display to a red round display. Also, for example, if the active display change notice effect B-2 is executed, the active display is changed to a blue round display, and if the active display change notice effect B-3 is executed. Change the active display to a red round display.

  If it is not the case where the accessory effect is executed, the effect control CPU 101 executes the push button operation suggestion effect (the hold change notice effect C-2 to C-3 or the active display change notice effect C- Whether or not 2 to C-3 has been executed) (step S8615). If a push button operation suggesting effect has been executed, the effect control CPU 101 has detected whether or not a pressing operation from the push button 120 has been detected (specifically, an operation detection signal from the push sensor 124 has been input). Whether or not) has been confirmed (step S8616). If the pressing operation from the push button 120 is not detected (N in step S8616), the process is terminated as it is. That is, even if it is determined to change the hold display or active display to be notified, if the operation by the push button 120 is not performed, the change of the display mode of the hold display or active display described later is Neither is it executed, nor is control for causing the push button 120 to vibrate.

  If a pressing operation from the push button 120 is detected (Y in step S8616), the effect control CPU 101 drives the vibrator motor 120a and pushes the button 120 with the strength according to the change mode of the hold display or the active display. The periphery is vibrated (step S8617). For example, if the hold change notice effect C-2 or the active display change notice effect C-2 is executed, the vicinity of the push button 120 is vibrated by weak vibration, and the hold change notice effect C-3 or the active display change is performed. If the notice effect C-3 has been executed, the vicinity of the push button 120 is vibrated by strong vibration. And it transfers to step S8621 and CPU101 for production control performs control which changes to the display mode which determined the hold display or active display of notification object (step SS8621). For example, if the hold change notice effect C-2 is being executed, the hold display to be notified is changed to a blue round display, and if the hold change notice effect C-3 is being executed, a notice is given. Change the target hold display to a red round display. Further, for example, if the active display change notice effect C-2 is executed, the active display is changed to a blue round display, and if the active display change notice effect C-3 is executed. Change the active display to a red round display.

  If the push button operation suggestion effect is not executed, the effect control CPU 101 executes the stick controller operation suggestion effect (holding change notice effect D-2 to D-3, E-1 to E). -2 or active display change notice effects D-2 to D-3, E-1 to E-2) (step S8618). If the stick controller operation suggestion effect has been executed, the effect control CPU 101 has detected whether or not the tilt operation from the stick controller 122 has been detected (specifically, the operation detection signal from the tilt direction sensor unit 123). (Step S8619). If the tilting operation from the stick controller 122 has not been detected (N in step S8619), the process ends. That is, even if it is determined to change the hold display or active display to be notified, if the operation by the stick controller 122 is not performed, the change in the display mode of the hold display or active display described later is The control is not performed and the stick controller 122 is vibrated.

  In this embodiment, when the on-hold change notice effect E-1 to E-2 and the active display change notice effect E-1 to E-2 are executed, the change is already made before the hold display or the active display is changed. Although the stick controller 122 is slightly changed, even in this case, if the operation by the stick controller 122 is not performed, the change in the display mode of the hold display and the active display, which will be described later, is not executed, and the stick controller 122 It is assumed that the weak fluctuation of the controller 122 is stopped.

  If the tilting operation from the stick controller 122 is detected (Y in step S8619), the effect control CPU 101 drives the vibrator motor 126 and controls the stick controller 122 according to the intensity according to the change mode of the hold display or active display. Is vibrated (step S8620). For example, if the hold change notice effect D-2 or E-1 or the active display change notice effect D-2 or E-1 is being executed, the stick controller 122 is vibrated by weak vibration, and the hold change notice effect is produced. If D-3 or E-2 or active display change notice effect D-3 or E-2 has been executed, the stick controller 122 is vibrated by strong vibration. And it transfers to step S8621 and CPU101 for production control performs control which changes to the display mode which determined the hold display or active display of notification object (step SS8621). For example, if the hold change notice effect D-2 or E-1 has been executed, the hold display to be notified is changed to a blue round display, and the hold change notice effect D-3 or E-2 is executed. If so, the hold display subject to notice is changed to a red round display. For example, if the active display change notice effect D-2 or E-1 is being executed, the active display is changed to a blue round display, and the active display change notice effect D-3 or E-2 is changed. If it has been executed, the active display is changed to a red round display.

  If the character effect is being executed (if the hold change notice effect A-2 to A-3 or the active display change notice effect A-2 to A-3 is being executed), steps S8613 and S8615 are performed. , S8618 are determined to be N, respectively, without proceeding to steps S8613 to S8614, S8616 to S8617, and S8619 to S8620, the process proceeds to step S8621 as it is, and the effect control CPU 101 performs the hold display or active of the notice target Control to change the display mode to the determined display mode is performed (step SS8621). For example, if the hold change notice effect A-2 is being executed, the notice target hold display is changed to a blue round display, and if the hold change notice effect A-3 is being executed, a notice is given. Change the target hold display to a red round display. Further, for example, if the active display change notice effect A-2 is executed, the active display is changed to a blue round display, and if the active display change notice effect A-3 is executed. Change the active display to a red round display.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if it is determined that the hold display or the active display to be notified is changed by executing the determination process in step S8616 or step S8619, the push button 120 or In the case where the operation by the stick controller 122 is not performed, the case where the change of the display mode of the hold display or the active display is not executed is shown, but the mode is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the operation by the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 is not performed, the display mode of the hold display or the active display of the notice target may be changed at the end of a predetermined operation valid period.

  Note that the processes in steps S8108 to S8109 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  Further, in this embodiment, the processing in steps S8106 and S8107 shown in the first embodiment is omitted in the effect symbol variation processing. However, in this embodiment as well, the processing in steps S8106 and S8107 is performed in the same manner. May be configured to change the hold display and the active display in a plurality of stages.

  Next, a description will be given of the effects of the hold change notice effect and the active display change notice effect. FIG. 74 to FIG. 78 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the production mode of the pending change notice effect in the fifth embodiment. In FIGS. 74 to 78, the display screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C). In the example shown in FIGS. 74 to 78, it is assumed that the second hold display displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c is the hold display to be notified.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 74 to 78, as an example, the effect mode of the hold change notice effect is shown, but the effect of the active display change notice effect is also changed from the hold display to the active display. It is the same as the production mode shown in FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 74, an effect aspect of a hold notice effect accompanied by a character effect as an effect effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 74 (A), when the active display is displayed in the active display area 9A and the three hold displays are displayed in the combined hold storage display unit 18c, the character image is displayed at the start timing of the character effect. Is started and the execution of the character effect is started (see steps S8601 and S8602). Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), a display is made in such a manner that the character throws the ball, and as shown in FIG. 74 (C), whether the ball hits the on-hold notification display and has exploded. Is displayed.

  And when it becomes the end timing of an effect production, as shown in Drawing 74 (D), if it is a case where the display mode of a hold display is changed (when hold change notice effect A-2-A-3 is performed), The display mode of the hold display to be notified changes from the normal mode (white round display) to the blue round display or the red round display (see step S8621). On the other hand, if the display mode of the hold display is not changed (when the hold change notice effect A-1 is executed), the character image is simply deleted and the character effect is ended, and the display mode of the hold display is not changed. (Refer to N in Step S8612).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, description will be made on the effect mode of the reservation notice effect with the effect effect as the effect effect. As shown in FIG. 75 (A), when the active display is displayed in the active display area 9A and the three reserved displays are displayed in the combined reserved storage display section 18c, By executing the motor 78b and starting the vibration operation of the movable member 78, the execution of the accessory effect is started (see steps S8603 and S8604).

  And when it becomes the end timing of an effect production, as shown in Drawing 75 (B), if it is a case where the display mode of a hold display is changed (when hold change notice effect B-2-B-3 is performed), By driving the movable member motor 78a, the movable member 78 is operated so as to cover a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (see step S8614). Further, as shown in FIG. 75B, the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes from the normal mode (white round display) to the blue round display or the red round display (see step S8621). . On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold display is not changed (when the hold change notice effect B-1 is executed), the movable member 78 is operated in such a manner as to cover a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Control is not performed and the display mode of the hold display does not change (see N in step S8612).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76, an effect aspect of a hold notice effect with a push button operation suggesting effect will be described as an effect effect. As shown in FIG. 76A, when the active display is displayed in the active display area 9A and the three hold displays are displayed in the combined hold storage display unit 18c, the start timing of the push button operation suggesting effect is reached. The effect display device 9 displays characters such as “Press the push button!” And the execution of the push button operation suggesting effect is started (see steps S8605 and S8606).

  Note that the push button operation suggestion display mode is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the mode of the hold display or the active display to be notified may be changed to an image simulating the push button 120 and displayed. In this case, instead of the character display such as “Press the push button!” Shown in this embodiment, the display mode of the hold display or the active display to be notified is changed to an image simulating the push button 120 and displayed. Thus, the image imitating the push button 120 may be configured to also serve as a push button operation suggestion display. Also, after changing the display of the hold display or active display for the advance notice to an image simulating the push button 120, a push button operation suggestion display is displayed by a character display such as "Press the push button!" You may comprise so that it may display.

  Next, it is assumed that the push button 120 is pressed by the player as shown in FIG. Then, at the end timing of the effect, as shown in FIG. 76C, if the display mode of the hold display is changed (when the hold change notice effects C-2 to C-3 are executed), Based on the detection of the pressing operation on the push button 120 (see Y in step S8616), the vibrator motor 120a is driven to vibrate by weak fluctuation or strong fluctuation (see step S8617). In addition, as shown in FIG. 76C, the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes from the normal mode (white round display) to the blue round display or the red round display (see step S8621). . On the other hand, if the display mode of the hold display is not changed (when the hold change notice effect C-1 is executed), the vibration operation around the push button 120 is not performed, and the display mode of the hold display does not change (step S8612). N reference). In this embodiment, even when the push button 120 is not pressed, the vibration operation around the push button 120 is not performed, and the display mode of the hold display does not change (see N in step S8616).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, an effect aspect of a hold notice effect accompanied by a stick controller operation suggestion effect as an effect effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 77 (A), when the active display is displayed in the active display area 9A and three hold displays are displayed in the combined hold storage display unit 18c, the stick controller operation suggestion effect start timing is reached. Then, characters such as “Draw stick controller!” Are displayed on the effect display device 9, and execution of the stick controller operation suggesting effect is started (see steps S8607 and S8608).

  Note that the stick controller operation suggestion display mode is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the on-hold display or active display mode of the notice target may be changed to an image simulating the stick controller 122 and displayed. In this case, instead of the character display such as “Press the stick controller!” Shown in this embodiment, the display mode of the hold display or the active display of the notice target is changed to an image imitating the stick controller 122 and displayed. Thus, the image imitating the stick controller 122 may be configured to also serve as a stick controller operation suggestion display. In addition, after changing the display of the hold display or active display of the advance notice to an image imitating the stick controller 122, a stick controller operation suggestion display is displayed by a character display such as "Press the stick controller!" You may comprise so that it may display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), it is assumed that the player has tilted the stick controller 122. And when it becomes the end timing of an effect production, as shown in Drawing 77 (C), if it is a case where the display mode of a hold display is changed (when hold change notice effect D-2-D-3 is performed), Based on the detection of the tilting operation of the stick controller 122 (see Y in step S8619), the vibrator motor 126 is driven to vibrate by weak fluctuation or strong fluctuation (see step S8620). Further, as shown in FIG. 77C, the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes from the normal mode (white round display) to the blue round display or the red round display (see step S8621). . On the other hand, if the display mode of the hold display is not changed (when the hold change notice effect D-1 is executed), the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 is not performed, and the display mode of the hold display does not change (in step S8612). N). In this embodiment, even if the tilt operation of the stick controller 122 is not performed, the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 is not performed, and the display mode of the hold display does not change (see N in step S8619).

  Further, in this embodiment, when the stick controller operation suggesting effect is executed as the effect effect, the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 may be started before the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), in the state where the active display is displayed in the active display area 9A and the three hold displays are displayed in the combined hold storage display unit 18c, the stick controller operation suggestion effect starts. At the timing, the effect display device 9 displays characters such as “Draw stick controller!” And the execution of the stick controller operation suggesting effect is started (see steps S8607 and S8608). Further, before the display mode of the hold display is changed, as shown in FIG. 78A, by driving the vibrator motor 126, the stick controller 122 is started to vibrate by weak vibration (step S8609). , S8610).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), it is assumed that the player has tilted the stick controller 122. Then, at the end timing of the effect, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), based on the detection of the tilting operation of the stick controller 122 (see Y in step S8619), the display mode of the hold display of the notice target Changes from a normal mode (white round display) to a blue round display or a red round display (see step S8621). In this case, if the hold change notice effect E-1 is executed and the display changes to a blue round display, the weak vibration of the stick controller 122 is continued, and the hold change notice effect E-2 is executed to display a red round display. In the case of changing to, the stick controller 122 changes to strong fluctuation. On the other hand, if the tilt operation of the stick controller 122 is not performed, the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 is stopped, and the display mode of the hold display does not change (see N in step S8619).

  As described above, according to this embodiment, in addition to the configuration shown in the first embodiment, a change effect (in this example, a hold change notice effect and an active display change notice effect) is executed. When the display mode of the specific display (in this example, hold display, active display) changes, the movable body (in this example, the movable member 78, the push button 120, and the stick controller 122) can be operated ( In this example, the movable member 78 can be operated, and the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 can be vibrated). Therefore, similar to the first embodiment, the effect of changing effects can be improved.

  In this embodiment, in the change effect (in this example, the hold change notice effect, the active display change notice effect), the movable member 78 is operated, or the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 is vibrated. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, by moving the movable body as an effect different from the change effect, the movable body may be configured to operate when the change effect is executed and the display mode of the specific display changes. .

  Further, according to this embodiment, the control that succeeds or fails in the change of the display mode of the specific display based on the operation of the operating means (in this example, the push button 120 and the stick controller 122) as the movable body. I do. Then, the operating means is operated when performing control that succeeds in changing the display mode of the specific display (in this example, the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are vibrated). Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect by operating the operation means when the change of the display mode of the specific display is successful.

  In this embodiment, the case where the operating means such as the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are vibrated is shown. However, the operation mode is not limited thereto. For example, it is configured so that some movable parts are provided inside or outside the operation means, and the operation means is caused to operate a movable part provided inside or outside according to the operation, or a move provided inside or outside in the event of a chance. (For example, the operation means is composed of a transparent member or a semi-transparent member, and a decorative body that can be vibrated is provided inside, so that the decorative body can be visually recognized as moving. May be). As such, it is only necessary to be configured to be able to operate the operation unit when the change of the display mode of the specific display is successful by some method, not limited to the vibration operation of the operation unit itself.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the control that succeeds or fails in the change of the display mode of the specific display based on the operation of the operating means (in this example, the push button 120 and the stick controller 122) as the movable body. I do. Then, the operating means is operated when performing control that succeeds in changing the display mode of the specific display (in this example, the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are vibrated). In addition, there is a case where the operating means is operated before performing control that succeeds in changing the display mode of the specific display (in this example, the hold change notice effect E-1 to E-2 and the active display change notice effect E-1). When executing E-2, weak vibration of the stick controller 122 is started before the hold display or the active display to be notified changes. Therefore, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect. In particular, in this embodiment, if the stick controller 122 is oscillating before the hold display or active display changes, at least the hold display or active display changes to either blue or red round display. Is confirmed, and an unexpected production can be realized.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the change effect can be executed in a mode that does not use the operation means (in this example, the hold change notice effect A-1 to A-3 with the character effect and the active display change notice effect) A-1 to A-3 can be executed). Further, when the change effect is executed in a mode that does not use the operation means, the change effect can be executed in a mode in which the operation means is not operated (in this example, the hold change notice effect A-1 to A-3 or active When the display change notice effects A-1 to A-3 are executed, the vibration operation of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 is not performed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect by providing the operation means not to operate.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the specific display can be changed to one of a plurality of types of display modes (in this example, a blue round display or a red round display). is there. Then, depending on which display mode the specific display is changed to, the movable body is operated in a different operation mode (in this example, the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 is changed when changing to a blue round display). In the case of a slight change and a change to a red round display, the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are strongly changed). Therefore, the production effect can be improved by changing the operation mode of the movable body.

  In this embodiment, as a method of changing the operation mode of the movable body, the case where the strength (weak vibration and strong vibration) of the vibration operation of the movable body is made different is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. . For example, you may make it vary the vibration period of a movable body. In this case, for example, when changing to a blue round display, the vibration period of the stick controller 122 as a movable body is shortened, and when changing to a red round display, the vibration period of the stick controller 122 is lengthened. May be. As long as the operation mode of the movable body is different depending on the change mode of the hold display or the active display in any form.

  Further, according to this embodiment, a plurality of types of operation means (in this example, the push button 120 and the stick controller 122) are provided as the movable body. Then, the degree of advantage varies depending on which operation means is used to execute the change effect (in this example, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 71, the stick controller operation effect is executed and the operation of the stick controller 122 is performed. When the push button operation effect is executed and the operation of the push button 120 is performed, the display mode of the hold display or the active display of the notice target in the case of the super reach big hit is changed and the operation unit The rate at which the operating means vibrates is increased, and the rate at which the operating means is strongly changed by changing to a red round display is increased). Therefore, since the degree of advantage varies depending on which operation means is used, it is possible to improve the effect.

  In this embodiment, the case where the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are provided as a plurality of types of operation means has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a jog dial, a cross key, a touch panel, or the like may be provided as the operation means, and various modes may be considered as a plurality of types of operation means.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 71, the operation means vibrates by changing the display mode of the hold display or the active display as an advantage depending on which operation means is used. While the ratio is different, the ratio of the operation means to be strongly fluctuated with the change to the red round display is high, but as such, depending on which operation means it is, the advantage is , Presence / absence of change of hold display or active display, change mode (whether it is a blue or red round display), the operation rate of the operation means, any one of the operation modes of the operation means, plural, Or what is necessary is just to be comprised so that all may differ.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the operation ratio and operation mode of the operation means are different in conjunction with the presence / absence of changes in the hold display and the active display, but this is not the only mode. For example, when configured so that the hold display or active display may not change even if the operation means operates, the presence or absence of operation of the operation means and the operation mode are set regardless of whether the hold display or active display changes. You may comprise so that it may differ. It is sufficient that the advantage differs depending on what type of operation means is used.

  In this embodiment, the case where the movable member 78, the push button 120, and the stick controller 122 are used as the movable body has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a movable sub-display device (sub-display device) may be provided as the movable body. FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification of the effect mode of the hold display change notice effect when the sub-display device is provided as the movable body. In FIG. 79, the display screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C). In addition, in the modification shown in FIG. 79, the effect mode of the hold change notice effect is shown as an example. However, in the effect mode of the active display change notice effect, the object whose display state changes is changed from the hold display to the active display. It is the same as that of the production | presentation aspect shown in FIG.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 79, a sub display device 9S (sub display device) is provided separately from the effect display device 9 (main display device), and the active display area 9A is displayed on the sub display device 9S to display the active display. At the same time, it is assumed that the total hold storage display unit 18c is displayed on the sub display device 9S and the hold display is displayed. In addition, in the modification shown in FIG. 79, it is assumed that the second hold display displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c is the hold display to be notified. In the example shown in FIG. 79, an active display and three hold displays are displayed on the sub display device 9S. For example, the entire display is displayed in a smaller size or the hold display is displayed in two stages. Alternatively, the active display and the eight hold displays may all be displayed.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 79, when the start timing of the effect presentation is reached, as shown in FIG. 79A, the vibration operation of the sub display device 9S is started. Next, at the end timing of the effect, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), the sub display device 9S is rotated (in this example, rotated clockwise), and the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed. The normal mode (white round display) is changed to the blue round display or the red round display. After that, as shown in FIG. 79C, the sub display device 9S is rotated in the reverse direction (in this example, rotated counterclockwise) to return the sub display device 9S to its original position.

  According to the modification shown in FIG. 79, it is possible to operate the display means (in this example, the sub display device 9S) provided with a display area for specific display as a movable body. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect by operating the display means provided with the display area for specific display.

  The operation mode of the sub display device 9S is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. For example, the sub display device 9 </ b> S may be configured to operate so as to overlap the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 9. In this case, for example, the sub display device 9S does not overlap the effect display device 9 at the initial position, but moves to a position overlapping the effect display device 9 when the sub display device 9S operates. May be. On the contrary, the sub display device 9S overlaps the effect display device 9 at the initial position, but moves to a position not overlapping the effect display device 9 when the sub display device 9S operates. May be.

  In this embodiment, both the hold change notice effect and the active display change notice effect are configured to be executable, and the display modes of both the hold display and the active display are configured to be changeable. It is not limited to such a mode. For example, only one of the hold change notice effect or the active display change notice effect may be configured to be executable, and only one display mode of the hold display or the active display may be configured to be changeable.

  In addition, the configuration for operating the movable body when changing the hold display or the active display in the hold change notice effect or the active display change notice effect shown in this embodiment is appropriately the structure shown in the first embodiment. It is possible to configure a gaming machine by applying. For example, in the configuration in which the on-hold notice effect such as the hold shown in the first embodiment is executed and the hold display and the active display can be changed in a plurality of stages, the hold change notice effect and the active display change shown in this embodiment When a notice effect is applied and the hold display or active display changes, the movable member 78 may be operated, or the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 may be vibrated.

  Note that it is also possible to configure a gaming machine by appropriately combining the configurations shown in the first to fifth embodiments described above, the configurations of the respective modifications shown in FIG. 79, and the like. is there. That is, the configurations shown in any one of the first to fifth embodiments and the modifications described above are appropriately combined, or all the embodiments and You may make it comprise a game machine combining the structure shown in the modification.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the variation time, the type of reach production, the presence / absence of pseudo-continuation (the production in which one or more temporary stoppages and re-variations are performed during one variable display), and the like In order to notify the microcomputer 100 for effect control of the change pattern indicating the change mode, an example in which one change pattern command is transmitted when starting change is shown, but the change pattern is generated with two or more commands. You may make it notify to the microcomputer 100 for control. Specifically, in the case of notifying with two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 is the first command before reaching a reach such as the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream, the presence or absence of a slide effect, etc. A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop is transmitted, and the second command is a so-called “reach” when the reach is reached, such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of a redrawing effect. You may make it transmit the command which shows the variation time after a 2nd stop) and a variation aspect. In that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in variable display (variable display) based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 may notify the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 may select a specific change mode executed at each timing. . When two commands are transmitted, the two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt. After transmitting the first command, a predetermined period elapses (for example, the following A second command may be sent (in a timer interrupt). Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to such an example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern with two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, “the ratio is different” is not limited to those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: This is a concept that includes those with different ratios (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols such as “1” to “9”, production symbols, and normal symbols are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed is shown. It is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking one kind of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to a plurality of types according to the operation of the operation lever by the player when a medal is inserted and a predetermined bet number is set. When the symbol is rotated according to the stop button operation by the player and the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination, it is applied to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible to do.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize, and encloses a game medium such as a game ball to give a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied. It can also be applied to a game machine of the type.

  Also, in each of the above embodiments, there is a gaming machine that is controlled to a probable state after the big hit game based on the fact that the big hit type has a probable big hit or a normal big hit, and the big hit type is determined to be a promiscuous big hit. However, it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The configuration described in each of the above embodiments can be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a certain change state after the completion.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, whether or not the game control microcomputer 560 is a big hit or a winning determination (pre-reading determination) of the variation pattern type is performed, and a command (designation designating) indicating the winning determination result is performed. Command, variable category command) is transmitted, and the notice control effect such as hold is executed on the effect control microcomputer 100 side based on the command indicating the determination result at the time of winning. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the winning control determination (pre-reading determination) may be performed on the production control microcomputer 100 side. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a command for designating only the values of the jackpot determination random number (random R) and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted at the time of starting winning. In addition, the presentation control microcomputer 100 side may be configured to make a winning determination (pre-reading determination) based on random number values specified by these commands.

  The present invention is preferably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in which a player can play a predetermined game.

1 Pachinko machine 8a First special symbol display 8b Second special symbol display 9 Production display device (main display device)
9A Active display area 13 First start winning opening 14 Second starting winning opening 18c Total pending storage display section 20 Special variable winning ball apparatus 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 78 Movable member 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP
120 push button 122 stick controller

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A first effect display area and a second effect display area;
Hold storage means for storing information relating to variable display as hold storage;
Specific display means capable of displaying a specific display in the first effect display area;
Determining means for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state;
Variable display execution means for executing variable display over any one of a plurality of types of variable display times;
Wherein based on the determination result determining means, and a change suggested demonstration execution unit capable of executing the changes suggested effect,
As the change suggestion effect, including a predetermined change suggestion effect that suggests whether or not the display mode of the specific display changes, and a shift change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display at the timing of starting the variable display,
The specific display unit, a specific display, a hold display corresponding to pending memory, corresponding display and that corresponds to the variable display of the running, and capable of displaying,
When the predetermined change suggestion effect is executed and the display mode of the specific display changes, the movable body can be operated,
The change suggestion effect execution means includes:
When variable display is executed over a short variable display time of the plurality of types of variable display time, and when variable display is executed over a long variable display time of the plurality of types of variable display time, The number of timings at which change suggestion can be performed is different,
When the display mode of the corresponding display is changed, compared to the case where the display mode of the hold display is changed, there are many types of production modes of the predetermined change suggesting effect that can be executed at the timing of starting the variable display,
The first predetermined change suggesting effect that suggests whether or not the display mode of the specific display changes in the first effect display area, and the specific display by the aspect that spans the first effect display area and the second effect display area a second predetermined change suggest directing suggest whether the display mode is changed, it is possible to execute,
The display mode of the specific display may not change even if any of the first predetermined change suggesting effect and the second predetermined change suggesting effect is executed,
The gaming machine, wherein a ratio of change in the display mode of the specific display varies depending on which of the first predetermined change suggestion effect and the second predetermined change suggestion effect is executed.

Images